JP6733087B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when the identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a predetermined profit can be given to the player. It is known to perform special games. In addition to special games, this type of gaming machine has a shorter variation time of identification information than usual, a higher frequency of entry of game balls into the starting opening than usual, and identification information in a specific mode. There are some players that can give a predetermined privilege to the player, such as making the probability of stop display higher than usual. Regarding this privilege grant, during a special game, a "privilege determination game" is performed to determine whether or not to grant a privilege based on whether or not a game ball entering a predetermined variable ball entrance passes a specific area. There is known a gaming machine that notifies the result of this privilege determination game by means of effects or the like (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-161615, A

In the gaming machine equipped with the privilege determination game as described above, the possibility that the game ball will pass through the specific area is determined by the variable entrance (hereinafter also referred to as “specific variable entrance”) relating to the passage of the game ball into the specific area. It is generally different according to the opening pattern of (i.e.). However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the special game including the privilege determination game is started, so for the player, the opening of the specific variable entrance is triggered by the start of the special game. It becomes possible to watch the pattern (opening operation). Therefore, for example, there is a case where it is possible to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. at an early stage when the specific variable ball entrance starts opening, that is, immediately after the start of the privilege determination game. .. In this way, if it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball can pass to a specific area immediately before the start of the privilege determination game, whether the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) or Before the result of the game is announced, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. will be known, which may lead to a decline in the interest of the privilege determination game and dilution of the existing value. is there.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to make it difficult to recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is started, and to play a game machine provided with the privilege determination game. It is to improve the interest.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention has the following configurations.
That is, the gaming machine of the first invention,
Identification information display means for stop display after the identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with ,
A first demonstration execution unit capable of executing a first rendition of Jo Tokoro,
Second effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined second effect during the special game;
Equipped with
As the special game, the special game execution means performs a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area, and a round after the privilege determination game. It is possible to execute a specific special game to play a game,
The first demonstration execution means, the first effect in the variable display of the identification information if the previous SL identification information is the particular special game based on the display stops at a particular manner and variably displayed is performed together can begin, the first effect that the start identification information in the varying display can ends after the start of the benefits determined game in the particular special game to be executed based on the stopped and displayed in a specific manner Yes,
The second effect execution means is capable of executing the second effect in the round game after the privilege determination game after the end of the first effect, and the second effect is the result of the privilege determination game. It is possible to be executed as a result notification effect .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect of the present invention, after the start of the first effect, the change of the identification information ends (stop display), the start of the special game, the start of the privilege determination game, the game situation changes, Since the first effect is performed during that time, for example, the effect does not end or a new effect does not start in synchronization with the timing of the change in the game situation. This makes it possible to make it difficult to recognize the start of the special game or the start of the privilege determination game, and in turn, determine the possibility of passing the game ball to a specific area in the privilege determination game, the presence/absence of the passage, etc. ) It is possible to make it difficult. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine provided with the privilege determination game.

According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine provided with the privilege determination game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the game machine concerning the example of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display unit shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display units included in the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the types of jackpots and the opening patterns of the special winning opening. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a big hit type determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of an interrupt process. It is a flow chart of starting opening sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of a general operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flow chart of a normal symbol hit/miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of processing during normal symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric auditors product processing. It is a flow chart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 success/failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 hit/miss judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a special winning opening closing process. It is a flow chart of an input/output number coincidence determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of specific area sensor detection processing. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of starting entry. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flow chart of sub-control main processing. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flow chart of 2ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart of variation effect start. It is a flowchart of a specific effect start process. It is a schematic diagram of a second big winning device. 9 is a table showing correspondences between jackpot types and ending times. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the 7R 4th big hit opening pattern and the 7R 5th big hit opening pattern. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a V attacker and a specific area in a V round. 7 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a V attacker (short open) and a specific area in a V round. 7 is a timing chart showing a relationship between a V attacker (long open) and a specific area in a V round. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific production performed with an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display mode of the specific production performed with an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing (big hit game) of the second embodiment. It is a flow chart of the 1st special winning opening closing processing of Example 2. It is a flow chart of the 2nd special winning opening closing processing of Example 2. 9 is a flowchart of an input/discharge number matching determination process according to the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart of round counter subtraction processing according to the second embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the big hit game of the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process of the third embodiment. It is a table showing a confrontation effect pattern determination table of the third embodiment. 8 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the 7R fourth jackpot opening pattern and the 7R fifth jackpot opening pattern of the first modification of the first embodiment. 9 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the 7R fourth jackpot opening pattern and the 7R fifth jackpot opening pattern of the second modification of the first embodiment. It is a table showing correspondences between types of big hits and ending effects.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed due to the end of the variable display of the symbol, a pachinko game machine capable of executing a winning game in which a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) can be given to the player An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 is configured to have a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on an island facility of a hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end side and are configured to be openable and closable.

Further, in the front frame 51, a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity according to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player, a game ball that stores and stores the game ball can be supplied to the launcher side. A ball hitting tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as "operable by the player during the execution of the game effect that is executed as the game progresses". And is also simply referred to as “effect button 63”). For the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be selectively used according to the type of game effect.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a frame lamp 66 for decoration and a speaker 67. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example, an input detecting means for detecting an input from the player or a player directly contacting the button portion to input) can be used. , A retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects when a part of the player's body approaches and inputs. Good. On the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball shot by operating the launch handle 60 flows down is formed surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 that guide the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, so that the game ball once guided to the game area can be prevented from returning to the launcher side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit") in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbol 8") are displayed. The production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R perform variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b is composed of, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right", a left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, and a medium effect in the middle symbol display area. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Moreover, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) that represent numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") (that is, the special symbol right/wrong judgment) The result (also simply referred to as “judgment determination”) is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”.

For example, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, a three-digit same doublet such as "777" (also referred to as "big hit effect design") or a preset chance design such as "135" or " It is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a special symbol such as "3*3" (also referred to as "special symbol"). Further, when it comes off, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” has a different symbol pattern (also referred to as “detachment effect design”) in which the effect design can be stopped and displayed. It is possible. As a result, the player can easily understand the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol hit/miss determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The presentation symbol displayed in the symbol display area 7b is grasped by looking at it. Then, in the first embodiment, for the big hits other than the 2R big hit and the 7R big hit, which will be described later, for example, the display screen 7a (the effect) when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (fixed display). It is assumed that the player can easily recognize the occurrence of a big hit (first effect form), such as stopping and displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the approximate center of the symbol display area 7b), 2R big hit and 7R big hit. As for, for example, a mode in which it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of a big hit by, for example, displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in a small stop at the corner of the display screen 7a or shortening the stop display time (second effect mode) I am going to do it in. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not have to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). .. Further, as a mode of variable display of the effect symbols, there is a mode of scroll display in vertical, horizontal, diagonal direction, etc., for example.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect symbol game effect) using the effect pattern as described above, a big hit game effect executed in association with a big hit game, and waiting for customers. A demonstration effect etc. is displayed. In the effect design game effect, the big hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect patterns such as numbers, effect images other than effect patterns such as background images and character images are also displayed. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) that displays a first effect hold 9a according to the number of memories of a first special figure hold described later, There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the number of stored first special figure hold and the second special figure displayed on the later-described first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4). The number of stored second special figure reservations displayed by the figure reservation indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center ornament 10 is provided so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center ornament 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center ornament 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11 and can enter the first starting opening 20 described later. Further, on the upper part of the center decoration body 10, there is an electric decoration member such as an LED (board surface lamp 5) which can be turned on in accordance with the game state, and a decoration member 13 in the shape of characters or figures is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decoration member 14 is visible, but, for example, the movable decoration member falls downward in association with the execution of the game effect with a relatively high probability of hitting, and the movable decoration member is lowered. The member covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it is visible. This increases the player's expectation of winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first starting opening 20 in which the ease of entering a game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, random numbers for special symbol hit determination, etc. are acquired, and if the predetermined conditions are set in advance, the hit determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol hit (Judgment) is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment.

To the right of the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port") having a variable second starting port 21 in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. It is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, random numbers for special symbol hit determination, etc. are obtained, and if the predetermined condition is set in advance, the hit determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol hit determination ) Is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the judgment. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member (blade member) 23, and operates the movable member 23 to open and close the second starting port 21. By this opening/closing operation, the second starting opening 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (opened state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode. is there. The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting opening 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and cannot enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the opened state. It does not have to be impossible to enter.

To the right of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") having a first big winning opening 30 and a second big winning opening 35. The second special winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable winning entrance”) is provided, and in the first embodiment, the true value of the first special winning device 31 (first special winning opening 30). The second special winning device 36 (the second special winning opening 35) is arranged above. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and operates the opening/closing member 32 to open/close the first big winning opening 30. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first special winning opening 30 can enter the game ball only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable ball entrance 31 is in a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter and a ball entry possible state in which the game ball can enter (open state) by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It can be changed to and.

Further, the second special winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and operates the opening/closing member 37 to open/close the second special winning opening 35. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second special winning opening 35 can enter the game ball only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second variable ball entrance 36 is in an unenterable state (closed state) in which the game ball cannot enter and an enterable state (open state) in which the game ball can enter by opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It can be changed to and. In addition, the second special winning device 36 specifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which the game balls entered in the second special winning opening 35 can pass, and the game balls entered in the second special winning opening 35. A movable piece 150 for guiding (distributing) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49 is included. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5), and the movable piece 150 is triggered by the opening of the second special winning opening 35, in other words, the opening operation of the opening/closing member 37. The operation is started. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49 and the specific area. It becomes impossible to pass 39. On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39 and the specific area 39. It is possible to pass 39. In the present pachinko gaming machine 1, a high probability state described later is generated based on the fact that at least one of the game balls that has entered the second special winning opening 35 has passed through the specific region 39. .. That is, the specific region 39 is a probability variation operating port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31. The details of the opening of the second special winning opening 35 (the opening operation of the opening/closing member 37) and the operation of the movable piece 150 will be described later. The high-probability state is one of the benefits of the game given to the player separately from the special game.

A gate 28 (game ball passage port) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side region of the center ornament 10 in the game region 3. On the basis of the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, the random number for normal symbol success/failure determination and the like are acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established in advance, it is normally determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 21. The normal symbol is variably displayed together with the symbol hit determination, and is normally stopped and displayed based on the result of the symbol hit determination. When the normal symbol hits the stop display, the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left hitting, and the batting method that shoots the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down the right gaming area 3B is called right hitting. .. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, at the start of the game, the player aims to enter the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to a hit or hit in the winning determination based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20, the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second by right-handing. The player will aim to enter the special winning opening 35. And when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the second starting opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening, and the general entrance, it is predetermined in each entrance. A number of game balls (also called "prize balls") are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right part of the game board 2. On the main display 40, a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that variably displays and stops the first special symbol, a second special symbol display that variably displays and stops the second special symbol. The device 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) for displaying variable and stop display of the ordinary symbol is included. In addition, the main display 40, the first special diagram reservation display 43a for displaying the number of hit determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the special determination hold information (second special symbol) A second special figure hold indicator 43b for displaying the number of memories of 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold indicator 44 for displaying the number of memories of operation hold (general figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 are included. ing.

Further, the main display 40, the hit indicator 48 showing that the result of the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination is a hit, the first special symbol hit determination or the second special symbol hit determination When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the hit game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability varying function is activated, and a shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right-handed hitting. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether to fire or to hit left. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit described later. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is carried out when the game ball enters the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display portion 41. In addition, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure reservation display section 43.

In the special symbol display portion 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped and displayed, and the special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The result of the lottery (special symbol win/no determination, big hit lottery) based on is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol hit determination. If the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information, specific mode) (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the open pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. At, a special game (big hit game) for opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is the first big hit (15R big hit), three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R first big hit symbol). When the second big hit (12R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijk" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R second big hit symbol). Further, when the third big hit (12R big hit), the three LEDs of "ijl" are turned on and the rest are turned off (12R third big hit symbol). When the fourth big hit (7R big hit), the four LEDs of "jnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fourth big hit symbol). Further, when the fifth big hit (7R big hit), the four LEDs of "mnop" are turned on and the rest are turned off (7R fifth big hit pattern). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off pattern). On the other hand, the second special symbol display device 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays the special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit determination. For example, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is the sixth big hit (15R big hit), the three LEDs of "abd" are turned on and the rest are turned off (15R sixth big hit symbol). When the seventh big hit (2R big hit), the four LEDs of "cdeh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R seventh big hit symbol). When the eighth big hit (2R big hit), the three LEDs of "cdgh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (2R eighth big hit symbol). In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "eh" are turned on and the rest are turned off (off pattern). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variation display is, for example, in a predetermined order, so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. A mode in which each LED is turned on can be adopted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, various information such as a random number for special symbol winning/disapproving determination based on the entering (“acquired information”). (Also referred to as a “special figure”), and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation storage unit 85a as a first special drawing reservation, and if the ball enters the second starting opening 21, the second special drawing. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a reservation. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in Embodiment 1 is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage unit" and "second acquisition information storage unit", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage unit". ..

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digesting the special figure hold means to determine a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol corresponding to the special figure hold, and to perform a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be executed immediately upon entering the ball, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is valid for the entered ball can be reserved with the predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “u□v□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is lit in red, as in “u□v●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off as in “u●v□”. Further, when the number of holdings is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●".

Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green such as “u▲v▲” to provide a display mode. In addition, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure reservations, the second special figure reservation is displayed. It displays the number. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “w□□□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings 1 to No. 4 is set similarly to the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed upon the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed shows the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. Notify me. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol hit/miss judgment. If the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is a specific normal symbol that has been determined in advance (per normal symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern that corresponds to the current game state is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment by the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, both LEDs are turned on and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as in "s.t. In addition, when the determination result is out, an out-of-normal pattern such as "s□t■" in which only the "t" LED is lit is displayed. In addition, the disengagement ordinary symbol is not a specific ordinary symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. is there.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol success/failure determination is acquired based on the passage, and various information acquired Is temporarily stored as a general figure reservation in the general figure reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section. An upper limit is set for the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the public figure hold means that the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol corresponding to the public figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the normal symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately upon the passage, that is, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. However, even with a predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not a normal symbol is valid for the passage. Then, the number of such figure holdings is displayed on the figure holding indicator 44. Specifically, the universal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of the universal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of the universal figure hold. is there. For example, when the number of holdings is 0, a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “q□r□” (for example, □: extinguished, ●: red lighting, ▲: green lighting), and the number of holdings is 1 In the case of, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, as in “q□r●”. In addition, the numbers of reservations 2 to 4 are also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", which performs control related to game profits such as special symbol win/loss determination, normal symbol win/loss determination, and game state transition). "), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", also referred to as "production control unit") that performs control related to production executed as the game progresses, and payout control that performs control regarding payout of game balls. Board 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), effect symbol 8 displayed on image display device 7, symbol displayed on effect indicator 102, effect 1st special figure reservation indicator 103a, and effect 2nd special figure An image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling display of the hold display 103b and the like is provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for housing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with a storage case such as an image control board for accommodating the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100, and a sub control board storage for accommodating the sub control board 90 on the storage case such as the image control board. A case is provided. A payout control board case for housing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for housing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits/receives data (information) to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be external. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage section 85 (first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b) and a general figure reservation storage section 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and an unspecified one. The area sensor 49a and the general entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls entering the second special winning opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls entering the second special winning opening 35. To do. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each of the general ball entrances 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

As the solenoids, the second starting opening solenoid 24, the first big winning opening solenoid 33, the second big winning opening solenoid 38, and the movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called "driving means". The second starting opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning a prize device 22, and the first special winning opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. is there. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning apparatus 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second special winning apparatus 36. is there. Further, on the main control board 80, the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special figure reservation display 43a, the second special figure reservation display 43b, general figure The hold indicator 44, the round indicator 45, the game state indicator 46, the firing direction indicator 47, and the hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main displays 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a payout device 120 for paying out prize balls or lent balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like are stored. A device that enables lending of a ball based on the information stored therein is connected, and a launching device 112 is also connected via a launching control board 111 (also referred to as a “launching control unit”). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is provided with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of gaming balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launching device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launching handle 60, and the launching volume 115 rotates the launching handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the firing motor 113 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

The main control board 80 also sends various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the program stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be external.

An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the effect 1st special figure reservation display 103a, and the effect 2nd reservation display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs, hold designs, etc.) And image data such as a background image are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display device 102 is composed of two LEDs, and performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the effect pattern 8, and turns on/off the two LEDs, or by a combination of colors, an effect pattern. The display result of 8 (the result of the determination of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the display mode. Moreover, the effect 1st special figure reservation indicator 103a and the effect 2nd reservation indicator 103b consist of two LEDs similarly. Then, by turning on/off the two LEDs or by combining the colors, the effect first special figure reservation display device 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first effect reservation display area 9c and the first special figure reservation display device 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of reserves as the displayed number of reserves. Also, the effect second special figure reservation display device 103b is displayed in a display mode showing the same number of reservations as the number of reservations displayed in the second effect reservation display area 9d and the number of reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. Controlled. This is to display the character symbol on almost the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion), or to move the movable decorative member 14 to cause the effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display portion) on the display screen 7a to be substantially entirely changed. By covering or the like, a part or all of the effect design, the first effect hold display section, or the second effect hold display section may become invisible, so such a display device is provided. .. A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs a sound, a song, a sound effect, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

Further, the production control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. (Also called lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and the lighting control of the lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although the movable decoration member 14 is visible only in part in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decoration body 10. The production control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to perform lighting control of the lamp or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

Further, on the sub control board 90, a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub control board 90.

Next, the control relating to the win/fail judgment in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. There are "big hit" and "off" as a result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment. When "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41, and when "out", "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display portion 41. When it is determined to be a big hit, a "special game" of opening the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped special display. The special game executed as a big hit is called "big hit game".

There are multiple types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 6, the types of big hits include "15R (round) first big hit", "12R second big hit", "12R third big hit", "7R fourth big hit", "7R fifth big hit", There are a total of eight types: "15R sixth big hit", "2R seventh big hit" and "2R eighth big hit". "15R 1st big hit" and "15R 6th big hit" are big hits in which the number of times (round number) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 15 "2 big hits" and "12R third big hits" are big hits in which the number of times (round number) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 12 times, "7R fourth big hit" And "7R 5th big hit" is a big hit with the number of times (round number) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) being 7 times, "2R 7th big hit" and "2R The "eighth big hit" is a big hit in which the number of times (the number of rounds) the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) is opened is two. In each of these jackpots, only the second special winning opening 35 (upper special winning opening) is opened while the first special winning opening 30 is closed in the first round and the second round, and in the odd rounds after the third round. The first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the second big winning opening 35 (upper winning opening) are opened in even rounds. That is, after the third round, the first big winning opening 30 (lower big winning opening) and the second big winning opening 35 (upper big winning opening) are alternately opened (the big one shown in FIG. 6). See the opening order column of the winning opening pattern). A predetermined interval time (closing time) is set between each round, and in the first embodiment, the interval time between the first round and the second round and the second round and the third time. The interval time between rounds is 2000 ms (2 seconds), and the interval time between other rounds is 200 ms (0.2 seconds).

Here, the big winning opening opening pattern during the big hit game will be described. First, in the odd-numbered rounds after the third round, the first special winning opening 30 is opened until 25000 ms (25 seconds) have elapsed from the start of the round, and is closed after 25000 ms (25 seconds) has elapsed to end the round. That is, the first special winning opening 30 is opened in the opening pattern of the opening time of 25000 ms and the opening number of once. By hitting the right on the first big winning opening 30 opened in this opening pattern, it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball. In the odd-numbered round, the second special winning opening 35 is maintained in a closed state (state in which the ball cannot be entered, state in which the game ball cannot be received). On the other hand, in the third and subsequent even rounds, the second special winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round, and then 1000 ms (1 second) is closed between each opening. Meanwhile, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in that order, and then the round is ended. That is, the second special winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern of the opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and the opening number of 5 times (second number). By hitting the right on the second big winning opening 35 opened in this opening pattern, it is possible to easily enter the game ball at the time of the first 16000 ms (16 seconds) opening, and at the other opening There are cases where a ball is thrown and cases where a ball is not entered. In the even-numbered round, the first special winning opening 30 is maintained in a closed state (state in which the ball cannot be entered, state in which the game ball cannot be received).

In addition, in the second round, the second special winning opening 35 is opened, but the movable piece 150 is operated upon the start of the opening (the first opening start). Of the eight types of jackpots mentioned above, "15R first jackpot", "15R sixth jackpot", "12R second jackpot", "7R fourth jackpot" and "2R seventh jackpot" are specified areas. It is a jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as "V passing planned jackpot") that opens the second winning jackpot 35 in such a manner that the game ball can easily pass (is possible) to 39. On the other hand, for “12R third big hit”, “7R fifth big hit” and “2R eighth big hit”, the second big winning opening 35 is set in such a manner that it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass to the specific area 39. It is a big hit to open (hereinafter also referred to as "V non-passing big hit"). The opening mode of the second special winning opening 35 and the operation mode of the movable piece 150 in the second round will be described. In the “V passing planned big hit”, the opening/closing operation of the second special winning opening 35 in the second round (opening pattern) ) Is the same mode as the even-numbered rounds after the third round described above. Then, the operation control of the movable piece 150 is started, triggered by the opening (first opening) when the second special winning opening 35 is opened until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round. Specifically, after 80 ms has passed from the first opening start of the second special winning opening 35 (that is, the round start), the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) for 80 ms is set, and then the non-operating state (movable state). One solenoid 151 is turned off), and when 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) have passed thereafter, the operating state (movable one solenoid 151 is turned on) is set again, and this state is maintained until 26000 ms (26 seconds) at maximum. Maintain (see Figure 52). For this reason, in the "V passing big hit", the movable piece 150 is continuously in operation when 3000 ms (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the second round, and thus 16000 ms (16 seconds) from the start of the second round. During the latter 13000 ms (13 seconds), the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 35 can pass through the specific area 39. Further, even after the opening of 16000 ms (16 seconds) is completed, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and 1000 ms( Since the opening for 1 second) is performed twice, respectively, the game ball that entered the second special winning opening 35 at the time of opening can also pass through the specific area 39. As a result, the “V passing planned big hit” is a big hit with a high probability that the game state after the big hit game is the high probability state described later. It should be noted that a right-hand hit is applied to the second special winning opening 35 which is opened in such an opening pattern, that is, an opening time of 23000 ms (second time) and an opening pattern of 5 times of opening (second opening) (second opening operation). By performing the above, it is possible to easily enter the game ball at the time of opening the first 16000 ms (16 seconds), and there may be a case of entering the game ball and a case of not entering the game ball at the time of other opening.

On the other hand, in the "V non-passing big hit", the operation of the movable piece 150 is controlled in the same manner as the "V passing big hit" from the start of the second round, and the second special winning opening 35 is set 100 ms (from the start of the second round). Only 0.1 seconds) is opened (opening and closing for a moment) and then closed to end the round (see FIG. 51). That is, the second special winning opening 35 is opened in the opening pattern (third opening operation) with the opening time of 100 ms (third time) and the opening number of once (third number). Therefore, in the "V non-passing big hit", the possibility that the game ball will enter the second special winning opening 35 in the second round is extremely low (substantially impossible), and the game ball is in the specific area 39. The possibility of passing through is extremely low (substantially impossible). As a result, the "V non-passing jackpot" is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is not likely to be a high probability state described later (absent), in other words, a normal state (low probability state) described later. It is a big hit with a high possibility. As described above, in the first embodiment, in the second round of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-probability state based on whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39. "Bonus decision game".

Further, even in the first round, the second special winning opening 35 is opened, but the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is different depending on the type of big hit. That is, in the first round of the "15R first big hit" and the "15R sixth big hit", the second special winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times, and the opening/closing operation mode is the third round described above. It is the same as the following even rounds. Therefore, in the first round of the "15R first big hit" and the "15R sixth big hit", it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the second special winning opening 35 by making a right hit. In addition, the first round of "12R second big hit", "7R fourth big hit" and "2R seventh big hit" (V passing planned big hit) is the "V non-passing big hit" (12R third big hit, 7R The second big winning opening 35 is opened in the same manner as in the second round of the fifth big hit and the 2R eighth big hit. That is, the second special winning opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round, then closed, and the round is ended. Therefore, in the first round of "12R second big hit", "7R fourth big hit", and "2R seventh big hit" (scheduled V passage big hit), the opening time is 100 ms (first hour), the number of times of opening is once (first The number of times) the opening pattern (first opening operation) opens the second special winning opening 35, and the possibility that the game ball will enter the second special winning opening 35 is extremely low (substantially impossible). ..

In addition, the first round of "12R third big hit", "7R fifth big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" is the above-mentioned "12R second big hit", "7R fourth big hit" and "2R seventh big hit". The second special winning opening 35 is opened a plurality of times in a mode in which the first round and the second round are connected (see FIG. 49). That is, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 in the first round of "12R third big hit", "7R fifth big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" which are "V non-passing big hits" is "V passing. Scheduled jackpot "12R 2nd jackpot", "7R 4 jackpot" and "2R 7 jackpot" 1st round opening pattern (1st opening operation) and 2nd round opening pattern (2nd opening operation) ) And are included in the interval time (here, 2000 ms). Specifically, after the second special winning opening 35 is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the round (first opening operation), it is opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds) after closing for 2000 ms, and then 1000 ms. While sandwiching the closing of (1 second) between each opening, one opening of 1000 ms (1 second), one opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) ( Second opening operation), respectively. Therefore, the first round of "12R third big hit", "7R fifth big hit" and "2R eighth big hit" is apparently "12R second big hit", "7R fourth big hit" and "2R seventh big hit". This is the same as when the first to second rounds of "big hit" are performed (end of the second round) (see FIG. 49). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the “V passing big jackpot” and the “V non-passing big jackpot” (for example, “7R fourth big jackpot” and “7R fifth big jackpot”) having the same number of rounds. Then, in the first embodiment, the movable piece 150 (sorting member) for sorting whether or not to guide the game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 to the specific area 39 is operated only in the second round. However, it is supposed not to operate in other rounds. From this, when the number of rounds is a big hit for the player, attention is paid to the opening and closing operation of the second special winning opening 35 from the first round in the big hit game. Even if it does, it is difficult to determine whether or not the game state after the big hit game is a high probability state described later (whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 39).

In addition, the distribution probability of each big hit in the hit determination of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), 15R first big hit 35%, 12R second big hit 5%, 12R third big hit 30%, 7R fourth The big jackpot is 10% and the 7R fifth big jackpot is 20%. If you divide it into a big jackpot for passing V and a big jackpot for not passing V, the big jackpot for passing V is 50% and the big jackpot for not passing V is 50%. There is. On the other hand, the distribution probability of each big hit in the hit determination of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 60% for the 15R first big hit, 20% for the 2R seventh big hit, and 20% for the 2R eighth big hit. When divided into the V passing big hit and the V non-passing big hit, the V passing big hit is 80% and the V non-passing big hit is 20%. That is, in the case of a big hit due to the hit determination of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21 which is easy to enter by the operation of the opening extension function (occurrence of a high base state) described later, Compared with the case where the big hit is determined by the hit determination of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20, the 15R big hit is more likely, and the V-passing big hit is also more likely. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than a big hit in the hit determination (big hit lottery of the first special symbol) performed by entering the game ball into the first start opening 20, the game to the second start opening 21 It is set so that the player who wins the ball in the hit determination (the big hit lottery of the second special symbol) is likely to be advantageous to the player. That is, the player expects the ball to enter the second starting opening 21 and plays the game. This is particularly remarkable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether or not to be a big hit is made based on "random number for special symbol win/fail determination (also referred to as "win/win determination information"), and the type of big hit when a big hit is achieved. The determination is performed based on "big hit type determining random number (also referred to as "symbol determining random number" and "symbol determining information")". As shown in FIG. 7(A), the special symbol validity determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 629”, and the jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of “0 to 99”. Further, the random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 includes a "variable pattern random number" in addition to the random number for determining the special symbol validity and the jackpot type determining random number. (Also referred to as "variation pattern information").

The fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 198". In addition, the random number acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 includes a random number for normal symbol success/failure determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is a random number for determining whether to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 (ordinary symbol lottery). Ordinary symbol random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 240".

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by a combination of the probability varying function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, the variation time shortening function, and the opening extension function in the activated state or the inactivated state. .. Special symbol (1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol) the state where the probability fluctuation function is operating is called "high probability state", the state not operating is "normal state (also called "low probability state") ". In the high-probability state, the probability of being judged as a big hit in the special symbol hit/miss determination is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state is used to determine whether or not to win, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state that has a large number of special symbol hit/miss determination random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot By using the above, the judgment of success or failure is made (see FIG. 8A). In other words, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit (the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), as compared with when it is not activated, the probability is high.

In addition, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) the state in which the variable time shortening function is operating is called "time saving state", and the non-operating state is called "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the confirmation display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern table that is determined such that the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9 ). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective ball entry into the starting opening (ball entry that can be stored as the special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. And the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are designed to operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function of the special symbol. That is, the probability varying function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the special symbol time saving state, and do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol hit/miss determination is higher than in the non-time saving state. In other words, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit determination table that is used in the non-time saving state. Perform (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variation display of the normal symbol is a hit (the stop symbol is a normal hit symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. ..

In the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the second starting opening 21 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times of opening of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning/judging determination is a hit in the non-time saving state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second starting opening is in the open state during that period. Become. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning/judging determination is a win in the time saving state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is supposed to perform the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

Probability variation function and variation time shortening function for ordinary symbols, and under the situation where the variable time winning device 22 opening time extension function and opening number increase function are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating. As a result, the second starting port 21 is frequently opened, and the game balls enter the second starting port 21 more frequently (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state", and a state in which these functions are not operating is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

The high base state (high frequency state) does not need to operate all the above functions. That is, by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the ordinary symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 than when the function is not operating. Also, it is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the special symbol time saving state. The function of generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming state after the special game in the case of any of 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit is , If the game ball has been passed to the specific area 39 during the special game, it becomes a high probability state of the special symbol and a time saving state and a high base state of the special symbol (see FIG. 6). This game state is particularly referred to as a "highly accurate and high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times, or the big hit is played and the big hit game is executed. Incidentally, if the game ball has not been passed to the specific area 39, the special symbol is in the normal state and the special symbol is in the time saving state and the high base state.

In addition, in the game state after the special game when the 12R third big hit and the 2R eighth big hit, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, Along with the normal state of the special symbol, the special symbol becomes a time saving state and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly called a "low accurate high base state". The low certainty high base state is ended by a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) the variable display of the special symbol is executed, or by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. The possibility is infinitely low, but if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, it becomes a “high-accuracy high-base state”.

In addition, the game state after the special game when the 7R fifth big hit is, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so that the special symbol becomes the normal state, It becomes the non-time saving state and the low base state of the special symbol (see FIG. 6). This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate low base state". Although the possibility is infinitely low, if the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the "high-accuracy high-base state" is set.

In the first embodiment, when the gaming state becomes the "high-probability-high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R second big jackpot, and the gaming state becomes "low-probability-high base state" due to the occurrence of the 12R third jackpot. In the case, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability fluctuation function is activated after the special game (big hit game) is finished, that is, whether it is the high probability state or the normal state (low probability state). I am trying to become. As described above, a state in which it is difficult to recognize whether the state is the high-probability state or the normal state (low-probability state) is referred to as a “probability non-notification state”. Similarly, in the case where the gaming state becomes the "high-probability-high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R seventh jackpot, and in the case where the gaming state becomes the "low-probability-high base state" due to the occurrence of the 2R eighth jackpot. The state after the end of the special game (big hit game) is referred to as the "probability non-notification state". In this "probability non-notification state", it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is in a high probability state through the appearance (appearance) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as effects that are performed according to the progress of the game (substantially). Impossible). This "probability non-notification state" can be generated until, for example, the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), which is the ending condition of the "low probability high base state". On the other hand, when the gaming state becomes the "high-probability high base state" due to the occurrence of any of the 15R first big jackpot, the 7R fourth big jackpot, and the 15R sixth big jackpot, this high-probability high base state has a high probability. The state becomes clear to the player, which is a so-called "probability variation game state" for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, three game states of "low accurate low base state", "low accurate high base state", and "high accurate high base state" can be set as game states. In addition to this, the high probability state of the special symbol and the non-time saving state and the low base state of the special symbol, that is, the “high-probability low base state” may be settable.

In a high-base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the right game area 3B by right-handing. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it has become. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger of the normal symbol hit determination, the right strike is performed to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (an opportunity to judge whether or not a special symbol is won) rather than hitting the ball left. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighted and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that it should be fired to the right game area.

On the other hand, in a low base state (for example, a low-probability low base state), it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the left game area 3A by left-handing. In the low base state, the second starting port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left hit is performed in order to insert the game ball into the first starting opening 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (an opportunity to determine whether or not a special symbol is won) rather than hitting the ball to the right. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is lighting-controlled (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing direction indicator 47 should be fired to the left game area.

Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz" and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y□z□" (for example, □: lights off, ■: lights up), it is possible to inform that the left game area should be fired. it can. Also, in the high base state, it is possible to inform that the right game area should be launched as a display mode for turning on both LEDs, such as "y■z■" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main controller) will be described with reference to FIGS. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, and various flags, status and counter reset And so on. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the ordinary symbols are “general symbols”, the special symbols are “special symbols”, the first special symbols are “special symbols 1” and “first special symbols”, and the second special symbols are “special symbols 2”. Sometimes referred to as "second special map".

Next to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 is updated by adding 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 ms, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, until the interrupt process (S105) is started next, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. To be executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, or the like. To do. The commands and the like output here include the game state, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is valid, the symbol as the jackpot type, the information regarding the variation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, first big winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 The detection signals detected by 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as the lower plate full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. It is performed both during the period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started.

Normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), then start port sensor detection process (S204), general pattern operation process (S205), special figure operation process (S206), specific area sensor detection process (S207) , Start-up time process (S208) and power-off monitoring process (S209) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is ended. Then, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (see FIG. 10), and when the interrupt pulse is input (about 4 ms later). ), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of ordinary symbol holding balls (the number of ordinary figure holdings, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of ordinary figure holdings provided in RAM) is It is determined whether it is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of ordinary symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol holding balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol holding balls (S303), and a normal symbol random number obtaining process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the obtained random number value (acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls in the ordinary figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S305). If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but if the game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches four (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not (S306). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), Special figure 2 1 is added to the number of reserved balls (S307).

Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label-TRND-A), the big hit type determination random number The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7A is acquired), and these acquisition random number values (acquisition) (Information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 2 balls in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S309). ). If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S309), the process ends, but if the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of 1st special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of 1st special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main controller 80) has reached 4 (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not (S310). Then, when the number of special character 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the processing is ended, but when the number of special character 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), Toku-zu 1 "1" is added to the number of reserved balls (S311).

Subsequently, special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 relational random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 relational random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol win/loss judgment counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determining random number counter (Label-TRND-AS) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random numbers shown in FIG. 7A). Numerical values are acquired), and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved sphere number in the first special figure reserved storage unit 85a.

[Public motion processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 13 subsequent to the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). In the universal figure operation process (S205), the process relating to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and the "universal figure action status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each stage. .. When the "universal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "universal figure operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S, YES in S403), the normal symbol fluctuation process (S404) is performed, and if the "general pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed If the "universal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, and S405 are all NO), the normal electric auditors product processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol winning/judging process described later is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol hit/miss determination processing (S502), normal symbol variation pattern selection processing is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8D, if the gaming state is a time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1 second and the normal symbol variation pattern is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time saving state, the normal symbol variation pattern of the normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Also, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, after the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started in the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol variation start processing, in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the variation start of the ordinary symbol, a normal symbol variation start command is set.

[Normal symbol judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol appropriateness determination processing (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the universal symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether the game state is a time saving state) (S602). In S602, the time saving flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state (the hit determination value is the hit determination value in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8C). It is determined whether or not there is a hit by the high-probability universal figure hit determination based on "0" to "239") (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, in S602, the time saving flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for non-time saving state of the ordinary symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) ( It is determined whether or not there is a hit by the low-probability universal figure hit determination based on the hit determination values of "0" and "1" (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the general/universal figure hit determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), stop display is displayed. A normal pattern (a non-genuine pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S605 that the hit is a hit (general figure hit) (YES in S605), the hit ordinary symbol to be stopped and displayed (design figure hit symbol) is determined (S607), and the hit figure flag is turned on (S608 ), processing is completed.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503) is followed by normal symbol random number shift process (S504). As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol random number shift processing (S504), first, the normal symbol holding sphere number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each of the universal figure reservations in the universal figure reservation storage unit is shifted to the side where the current position is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order pending storage in the universal figure pending storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending figure pending is cleared to 0 (S703). ), processing is completed. In this way, the universal figure hold is digested in the hold order.

[Normal symbol fluctuation process]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether the change time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if not (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if the time has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), and the universal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, the variable display of the normal symbol, after performing other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit ordinary symbol or a deviating ordinary symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining the ordinary symbol (S804), this process To finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol determination processing (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the universal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the universal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the universal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether the time saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern during the time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern in the non-time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The opening pattern in the non-time saving state is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.2 seconds is performed once, as described above. Therefore, "1" is set in the second opening opening counter. Then, following the opening pattern setting (S903, S906), the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this processing ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the universal figure end flag is ON (S1001). The universal figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting opening 21 is ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit.

If the end flag for universal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second starting port 21 has been reached (S1003). If not (NO in S1003), the process is finished For example, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is completed. On the other hand, if the second starting opening 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether or not the timing (timing) for closing the second starting opening 21 has been reached (that is, the second starting opening 21 is opened and then predetermined). Whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed) is determined (S1005), and if not reached (NO in S1005), the process is terminated, and if reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0". Yes (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S1008), the per-universal-university ending process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the per-universal-university ending flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second opening opening counter becomes “0” when the opening of the second opening 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times in the time saving state, and in the non-time saving state. When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the universal figure end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so The end flag is turned off (S1011), the universal figure hit flag is turned off (S1012), the universal figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal pattern operation process (FIG. 13).

[Special figure operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure operation processing (S206) after the normal figure operation processing (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 20, the process relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, and “Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each stage. When the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101 NO in S, YES in S1103), special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104) is performed, and if the "special symbol operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is confirmed If the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105), special electric auditors product processing (S1107) as a big hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol waiting process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of holding balls of special figure 2) is "0" (S1201). .. Special Figure 2 When the number of reserved balls is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, when the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting opening 21 is not stored, the first starting is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1206). If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is also “0” (YES in S1206), that is, if the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting opening 20 is not stored, the image is displayed. It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is in the process of being a standby screen (during the customer waiting demo screen is being executed) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process is terminated, Otherwise (NO in S1211), the standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, when the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, when there is one or more memories of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting opening 21. The following special figure 2 right/wrong judgment processing (S1202), special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1203), special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Further, when the special map 2 number of reserved balls is “0” but the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second starting opening 21 Although there is no memory, if there is at least one memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting opening 20, the special figure 1 success/failure determination process (S1207), the special figure 1 fluctuation described later. Pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is performed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed prior to the digestion of the first special symbol suspension (variable display of the first special symbol). Then, in the first embodiment, the winning/non-judgment determination based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit for the player than the winning/non-judgment determination based on the first special figure reservation (FIG. 8(B )).

[Special figure 2 Pass/Fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure 2 hit determination processing (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure pending storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first special figure pending first The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination stored in the corresponding RAM area) (of the oldest storage) is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not the high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is the normal state, the big hit determination table for the normal state (the big hit determination value is "3" and " 397”), and whether or not it is true is determined (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in the high probability state (YES in S1302), the success/failure determination is performed based on the big hit determination table for the high probability state in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

When the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is determined to be a "big hit" (YES in S1305), the value of the big hit type determining random number counter (label-TRND-AS) is read out and shown in FIG. 8(B). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table (S1307), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned on (S1309), and the process is ended. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1304) is determined not to be a "big hit" (NO in S1305), a deviating symbol is determined (S1306), and the process ends. In addition, in the case of the hit determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the big hit type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type. Here, the big hit judgment (special symbol hit judgment) and the big hit type determination judgment may be referred to as "judgment", respectively, and may be called "judgment" including which big hit pattern is judged by the big hit judgment. Good. Also, these results may be referred to as “judgment results”.

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of four LEDs of a 2R lamp, a 7R lamp, a 12R lamp, and a 15R lamp. Then, for example, when it becomes the 2R seventh big hit or the 2R eighth big hit, the 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Specifically, a display mode such as “2R-7RΔ12RΔ15RΔ” (for example, ▲: lit, Δ: unlit) is displayed. Further, when the 7R fourth big hit or the 7R fifth big hit, the 7R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is "2RΔ7R▲12RΔ15RΔ". Further, when the 12R second big hit or the 12R third big hit is reached, the 12R lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ7RΔ12R▲15RΔ”. When the 15R first big hit or the 15R fourth big hit is reached, the 15R lamp is lit up at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is definitely displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ7RΔ12RΔ15R▲”.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), following the special figure 2 winning/discarding determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the game state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). If it is determined in S1401 that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in the non-time saving state, then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (S1402). When it is determined in S1402 that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1402), the non-time saving state big hit table (the portion of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to the non-time saving state and the big hit) is referred to, A fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In this embodiment, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1404.

On the other hand, in S1402, if it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" or "2" (S1405). The number of reservations here is the number of storages including the information that determines the variation pattern by this processing, so the number of reservations storage is any value of "1 to 4". Then, in S1405, when it is determined that the number of holdings is either “1” or “2” (YES in S1405), the first holding number deviation table (non-time saving state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) Also, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the portion that is out of alignment and corresponds to the number of reserved balls "1, 2" (S1406). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1405 that the number of holdings is neither "1" nor "2", that is, either "3" or "4" (NO in S1405), the second holding number deviation table (The part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that is in the non-time saving state, is out of position, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls “3, 4”) and changes based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1407). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 is selected. Further, the first reserved number deviation table is set to have a higher possibility of selecting a fluctuation pattern of a comparatively long fluctuation time than the second reserved quantity deviation table. The shortest fluctuating time that can be selected (12000 ms) is also set to be longer than that of the second holding number deviation table (4000 ms).

When it is determined in S1401 that the time saving state is in effect (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1408). When it is determined in S1408 that the big hit flag is ON (YES in S1408), the fluctuation pattern is referred to with reference to the table for short-time big hit (the part corresponding to the short-time status and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1409). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P12 to P14 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1408 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1408), then it is determined whether the number of holdings is “1” (S1410). The number of reservations here is also the same as that described above, and the number of reservations is set to any value from "1" to "4". When it is determined in S1410 that the number of holdings is “1” (YES in S1410), the third holding number deviation table (in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. By referring to (corresponding part), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1411). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P15 to P18 is selected. If it is determined in S1410 that the number of holdings is not “1”, that is, the number of holdings is any of “2 to 4” (NO in S1410), the fourth holding number deviation table (shown in FIG. 9) The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the fluctuation pattern table that is in the time-saving state, out of sync, and corresponds to the number of reserved balls “2 to 4” (S1411). ). In this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P19 to P22 is selected. Here, the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the time saving state and the deviation is higher in the possibility that the short fluctuation pattern is selected than the fluctuation pattern selected in the case of the non-time saving state and the deviation. There is. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure reservation (promptly advance the game during the time saving) by allowing more variation patterns having a short changing time to be selected in the time saving state.

After the variation pattern has been selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 23 is performed (S1404), and the processing ends. Incidentally, in the other processing (S1404), processing such as setting a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the output buffer of the RAM is performed. Further, the fluctuation pattern designation command set in this processing is included in a fluctuation start command described later, and is transmitted to the sub control unit 90 by the output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved sphere count is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is set to the next lower level (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b includes an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003"). , Address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation fourth. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this processing ends.

After the special figure 2 random number shift processing (S1204) is executed, the special figure 2 variation start processing (S1205) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started.

In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 21, in the case where the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is "0", and the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) The special figure 1 right/wrong determination processing (S1207), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 Pass/Fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 hit/miss determination processing (S1207), processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 hit/miss determination processing (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to special figure 1, in S1601, the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) The special symbol hit determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) stored is read and processed.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1712) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved sphere count is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of each counter value in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set to the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this processing ends.

After the special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209) is executed, the special figure 1 variation start processing (S1210) of FIG. 21 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", and the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variable display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol changing process]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 21, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is continued.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), the variation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" ( S1905). If the probability variation counter is determined to be "0" in S1905, the probability variation flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and the probability variation counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

Then, in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving of counting the variable display number of special symbols executed during the time saving state The value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1908), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1909), and if it is "0" (YES at S1909), the time saving flag is turned off (S1910), Proceed to the processing of S1911. When it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, the variable display of the special symbol is subjected to other processing such as stopping at a result according to the determination result of the special symbol right/wrong determination random number and the big hit type determining random number (S1912), and this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is subsequently determined whether or not the type of jackpot is the 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot or 15R sixth jackpot) (S2002). If it is determined in S2002 that the type of big hit is 15R big hit (YES in S2002), "15" is set to the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit game (S2003), and in S2009. Move to processing.

When it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not the 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the 12R jackpot (12R second jackpot or 12R third jackpot) (S2004). If it is determined in S2004 that the 12R jackpot is a big hit (YES in S2004), the value of the round counter is set to "12" (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2004 that the jackpot type is not the 12R jackpot (NO in S2004), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the 7R jackpot (7R fourth jackpot or 7R fifth jackpot) (S2006). When it is determined in S2006 that it is a 7R big hit (YES in S2006), the value of the round counter is set to "7" (S2007), and the process proceeds to S2009. If it is determined in S2006 that it is not the 7R jackpot (NO in S2006), the jackpot type is 2R jackpot (2R 7 jackpot or 2R 8 jackpot), so the round counter value is set to "2" (S2008). , S2009 processing.

In S2009, the special winning opening opening pattern according to the type of the big hit is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. Here, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is determined according to the type of big hit (see FIG. 6), and in the present embodiment, the special winning opening that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. Specifically, in any of the big hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in the first and second rounds, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened and closed in the third round (if there are three or more big hits). It is supposed to do. On the other hand, in different big hits, the same second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed in the first round, but the opening and closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

That is, in the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is set for each type of big hit. Specifically, if it is the 15R first big hit, the opening pattern for the 15R first big hit is set, and the opening pattern for the 15R first big hit is executed during the execution of the 15R first big hit game. .. Also, if the 12R second big hit, set the opening pattern for the 12R second big hit, if the 12R third big hit, set the open pattern for the 12R third big hit, if the 7R fourth big hit, the 7R fourth Set the opening pattern for big hit, set the opening pattern for 7R 5th big hit if it is 7R 5th big hit, set the opening pattern for 15R 6th big hit if it is 15R 6th big hit, 2R 7th If it is a big hit, the opening pattern for the 2R seventh big hit is set, and if it is the 2R eighth big hit, the opening pattern for the 2R eighth big hit is set. Then, the corresponding big hit opening pattern is executed in each big hit game.

In S2010, a big hit opening command is set to start the big hit game (S2010). The opening command is determined according to the type of big hit, and is provided for each big hit, such as the 15R first big hit opening command and the 12R second big hit opening command. Then, according to the set opening command, the corresponding opening period is executed thereafter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, in the case of 7R fourth big hit or 7R fifth big hit, a period of 1900 ms is set as an opening period, and in the case of other big hits, an opening period of 8000 ms is set. Is set. Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set opening command to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control unit 90 which receives the opening command receives the opening command during the opening period. A corresponding predetermined game effect is performed. In S2011, the opening period of the big hit game is started (S2011), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2012). If it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process is ended.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special electric auditors product processing (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation flag is determined. Is turned off (S2102), and then it is determined whether the time saving flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning OFF the probability variation flag, and if NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning OFF the time saving flag. In other words, during the execution of the big hit game, the low probability state and the non-time saving state are controlled. In the first embodiment, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low base state during the execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening processing of the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) in the big hit game has ended (the big hit game has ended). When it is determined that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is then determined whether it is the start time of the round (S2106). This is determined based on the special winning opening opening pattern set for each type of big hit described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the first opening process of the first round after the opening period ends. If the first round has already been started, it is determined whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) has ended. The round is also simply called "R" or "round game".

When it is determined in S2106 that it is the round start time (YES in S2106), the round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the special winning opening opening process is performed (S2108). As a result, the special winning opening is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2107, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the first round start and "2R start command" for the second round start. .. The set round start command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90 by the output process of S201. In addition, in the special winning opening opening process of S2108, the special winning opening opening pattern determined according to the type of the jackpot to be executed, and the opening pattern defined in the starting round is started.

Next, in S2109, whether or not the round to be started is the V round (second round), that is, to start is to open the second special winning opening 35 (also referred to as “V attacker”) having the specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether the round is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (the specific area 39 is allowed to pass the game ball) (S2109). In this embodiment, the second round is set to the V round that operates the movable piece 150. In addition, a round in which the second special winning opening 35 having the specific region 39 inside is opened and the movable piece 150 is operated (V round) is also referred to as "specific round" or "specific round game", and V The "specific round" or "specific round game" in the jackpot game related to the expected big hit is also referred to as "first specified round" or "first specified round game", and the "specific round" in the jackpot game related to the V non-passed jackpot. The "specific round game" is also called a "second specific round" or a "second specific round game". A round that opens the second special winning opening 35 having the specific area 39 inside and does not operate the movable piece 150 is also called a "non-specific round" or a "non-specific round game", and is scheduled to pass V. The "non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" in the big hit game related to the big hit is also called "first non-specific round" or "first non-specific round game", and in the big hit game related to the V non-passing big hit. The "non-specific round" or "non-specific round game" is also referred to as "second non-specific round" or "second non-specific round game". In addition, a round in which the first special winning opening 30 having no specific area or movable piece inside is opened is also referred to as a “normal round” or a “normal round game”.

If it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is not the V round (second round), that is, the first round or the third round or later (NO in S2109), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2109 that the starting round is the V round (second round) (YES in S2109), the valid period of the specific area is set based on the predetermined specific area valid pattern (S2110). At the same time, the opening/closing operation of the specific area is started based on a predetermined specific area opening/closing operation pattern (S2111), and the process is ended.

Here, the specific area valid pattern is as shown in the timing chart of “Handling of passing through specific area” in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and is switched to valid or invalid at a predetermined timing shown in FIG. Further, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is also as shown in the timing chart of “specific area” in the timing chart of FIG. 50, and the movable piece 150 is operated to open at the predetermined timing shown in FIG. 50 (specific area). 39) and a closed state (a state in which the specific area 39 cannot be passed).

The specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts at the start of the V round (at the time of the first opening), ends at the V round, and ends at the timing when the interval period (2000 ms) set after the end of the V round ends. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). Further, as will be described later in detail, the specific region opening/closing operation pattern of the present embodiment is set to only one pattern, and starts from a closing period of 80 ms, then sets an opening period of 80 ms, and then in a predetermined pattern. There are open or closed periods. In addition, although the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is set to only one pattern, the end timing of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is different depending on the big hit game (V round to be executed), and as a result, it is different due to the difference in the execution period. It becomes a specific area opening/closing operation pattern. Specifically, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 51 and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern shown in FIG. 52 are different.

When it is determined in S2106 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Here, when it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the round, during the interval period after the end of the round, or during the special winning opening closing process described later. be able to. In S2112, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the predetermined opening pattern started in S2108 is being executed (in a round) (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the special winning opening/closing operation is being executed (during the round) (YES in S2112), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the round being executed is satisfied (S2113).

Here, as the round end condition of the present embodiment, (1) that the round execution time (for example, 29 s) defined in the running round has elapsed (or the release pattern defined in the running round is finished). What has been done) (2) In the running round, two conditions are defined: that a prescribed number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls entered in the running round have entered. Then, when either one of the conditions is satisfied, the round end condition is satisfied based on the previously satisfied condition. If it is determined in S2113 that the round ending condition is not satisfied (NO in S2113), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2113), the round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and the process proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round end command that can specify the round to be ended is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. .. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90 by the output process of S201.

If it is determined in S2112 that the special winning opening/closing operation is not being performed (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2115. In S2115, a special winning opening closing process described later is performed (S2115), and then it is determined whether or not the special winning opening closing process is completed (S2116). Here, in the special winning opening closing process, the interval period setting process, the winning/discharging number matching determination process in the chance round (the first round and the second round), the retry process when it is determined that they do not match, and the error When the notification process and the like are executed and these processes are completed, it is determined that the special winning opening closing process is completed. Further, the closing process flag is ON during execution of the special winning opening closing process, and when the special winning port closing process is completed (completed), the closing process flag is turned OFF. Therefore, the determination as to whether the special winning opening closing process has been completed is made based on whether the closing process flag is ON or OFF. Here, each of the interval period setting process, the winning/discharging number matching determination process, the retry process, and the error notification process that are executable in the special winning opening closing process are also individually referred to as “confirmation process”. Is generally called confirmation processing.

When it is determined in S2116 that the special winning opening closing process is not completed (the closing process flag is ON) (NO in S2116), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2116 that the special winning opening closing process has been completed (the closing process flag is OFF) (YES in S2116), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and the value of the round counter is "0". Is determined (S2118). If it is determined in S2118 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), the jackpot ending command is set (S2119) and the jackpot ending period is started as jackpot ending processing for ending the jackpot game. (S2120), the jackpot end flag is turned on (S2121), and the process ends. The value of the round counter becomes "0" when all rounds in the jackpot to be executed are completed.

Here, in the jackpot end process in S2119, the process of setting the ending command is performed, the ending command to be set, from a plurality of ending commands, the gaming state when the jackpot, the type information of the jackpot, and, One of the ending commands is selected and set based on the information indicating that the specific area has not passed (no specific area has passed) (whether the V flag is ON or OFF). The ending period to be executed (set) varies depending on which ending command is set. Here, the ending period is after ending all opening operations of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the big hit game, and the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) Is a period that is set before execution is possible, and is also referred to as an “end period”. During this ending period (end period), the special winning opening is closed. Further, the opening period is a period set before the first opening operation of the special winning opening in the big hit game is started and after the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol) is disabled, Also called. In addition, the effect executed in this "start period" is also referred to as "start effect".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 65, in the case where the gaming state is low probability time saving (low-probability low base state), as a result of the determination of the special symbol, the jackpot type is 15R first jackpot, 7R fourth jackpot. , Or the 15R sixth big hit, and the V flag is ON, that is, when the high hit state after the big hit game is in a high probability state (high accuracy high base state), an ending period of 17,000 ms (first ending period) ) Is executed to set the ending command. On the other hand, as a result of the special symbol hit determination, the big hit type is the 15R first big hit, the 7R fourth big hit, or the 15R sixth big hit, and if the V flag is OFF, that is, after the big hit game, a time saving state (low In the case of the high accuracy base state), an ending command for executing an ending period (second ending period) of 8000 ms is set.

As a result of the special symbol hit determination, if the big hit type is the 15R first big hit, the 7R fourth big hit, or the 15R sixth big hit, if the special area is passed, in the ending period, a high probability state after the big hit game (probability variation mode) When the effect (first specific effect) that indicates to the player that the transition is made is executed and the specific area has not passed (passes the non-specific area), in the ending period, shift to the time saving state (time saving mode) (The second specific effect) is performed (indicating that the player is in a low-probability state or not indicating that the player is in a high-probability state). In addition, in the present embodiment, the first specific effect that indicates to the player that a transition to the high probability state is a relatively long time effect, and indicates to the player that the transition to the short-time state (the high probability state. The second specific effect is a relatively short time effect (not shown to the player). As described above, in the present embodiment, it is necessary to execute ending periods of different lengths depending on the result of passing the specific area in the V round (whether the V flag is ON or OFF). Ending periods with different lengths can be set. As a result, the sub-control unit that receives the ending command can execute ending effects with different effect modes and effect periods according to the ending period (according to the gaming state after the big hit game). Here, in the V round (in the big hit game), the information indicating the specific area passage result of whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area is also referred to as “specific area information”. This specific area information has information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area in the V round, and information indicating that the game ball has not passed the specific area in the V round, and determines the ending period. The ending period determining means (end period determining means) for determining can determine the ending period based on the specific area information.

Further, in the case where the gaming state is low probability time saving (low-probability low base state) and the jackpot type is the 12R second jackpot or the 12R third jackpot, the V flag is ON or OFF. , An ending command for executing the common 8000 ms ending period (third ending period) is set. As a result of the special symbol hit determination, if the big hit type is the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit, in any case, the production mode (production mode) after the big hit game is finished, the special symbol hit determination This is because the probability non-notification state (also simply referred to as "non-notification mode") is set in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability (big hit probability) is high probability or low probability. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to these jackpots, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not passed, an effect "indicating entry into the non-notification mode" (third specific effect) is performed, so The ending period to be set is not changed depending on the area passing result. Here, in the present embodiment, the second ending period and the third ending period have the same length, but instead of this, the first ending period and the third ending period are set to the same length period. You may. Here, the non-notification mode may have a high probability or a low probability, that is, a high probability, by not notifying the player of the probability of success/failure determination (making it difficult to recognize). It is a production showing that. Here, as a result of the special symbol hit determination, the third specific effect executed in the ending period when the big hit type is 12R second big hit and 12R third big hit is also referred to as "first non-notification mode transition effect". This is different from the sixth specific effect (second non-notification mode shift effect) and the seventh specific effect (third non-notification mode shift effect), which will be described later, in the aspect and the effect period. These are different in probability (expectancy) of high probability, and the high probability expectation in this embodiment is the second non-notification mode transition effect>the first non-notification mode transition effect>the third non-notification mode transition effect. It is set in the order of the notification mode transition effect.

In addition, in the case where the gaming state is not low probability time saving (low-probability low base state), when the big hit type is 7R 5th big hit, and when the game state is low probability time saving (low probability high base state) or high probability time saving In the case of yes (high-precision high-base state), regardless of whether the V flag is ON or OFF (whether or not it passes through the specific area), a common ending period of 5000 ms (fourth ending) Ending command to execute (period) is set. This is because, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, the effect mode (effect mode) after the end of the big hit game is set to the "normal mode" which is the initial mode executed after the power is turned on. That is, in the ending effect executed in the ending period related to this big hit, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not passed, since the effect of “shifting to the normal mode” (fourth specific effect) is performed, depending on the specific area passing result, It is said that the ending period to be set will not be changed. "Normal mode" is a production mode that basically shows a low-probability low base state, but by this, even when the "normal mode" is set after the jackpot game is over, high-accuracy low (although unlikely) It may be in the base state. However, since the 7R fifth big hit is a "special area non-passing big hit", it is very difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during the big hit game. Further, the fourth ending period is shorter than the first to third ending periods. The low-probability low-base state is the most unfavorable game state among the game states set after the big hit game, so if a time is provided to notify the transition to such a game state for a long time, the player's willingness to play May decrease. In particular, when such a result (7R 5th big hit) occurs in the high-probability low base state or the low-probability low base state, the tendency shifts from the advantageous state to the disadvantageous state (normal state), which is remarkable. Is. For this reason, a short-term ending period is set to allow the game to proceed rapidly.

In addition, in the case where the gaming state has a low probability time saving (low-probability high base state) or a high probability time saving (high-probability high base state), the ending period (8000 ms, depending on the type of the big hit (the result of the special symbol judgment), 6000 ms, 3900 ms) (see FIG. 48), and the ending command to be set (the ending period to be executed) is not changed by the specific area passage information (V flag ON/OFF). Specifically, in the high base state, in the case of the 15R sixth big hit, in the ending period, in order to perform the effect "indicating that the high probability state (probability variation mode) continues" (the fifth specific effect), the ending period of 8000 ms (Fifth ending period). It should be noted that the reason why the 17,000 ms is not set is that the big hit in the high base state is the big hit after the second time (so-called a long-distance vacation), so in order to speed up the game progress during the long-distance play, it is appropriate (than the first big hit). The time is set (shorter). Further, in the high base state, when the 2R seventh big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is set to "non-notification mode". Then, in the ending period, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not passed, in order to perform the effect of “indicating entry into the non-informing mode” (sixth specific effect, second non-informing mode transition effect), the ending period of 6000 ms (Sixth ending period) is set. Further, in the high base state, when the 2R eighth big hit, the effect mode after the end of the big hit game is set to "non-notification mode". In the ending period, regardless of whether the specific area is passed or not passed, an effect of "indicating entry into non-notification mode" (seventh specific effect, third non-notification mode transition effect) is performed, so that an ending period of 3900 ms (7th ending period) is set.

In addition, since the 2R 7th jackpot is a "V passing big jackpot", if the player plays the game in the normal manner (as instructed), the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability state. Since the eighth big hit is a "V non-passing big hit", the game state after the big hit game is a time saving state. Therefore, in the ending period, the player plays the game with a higher sense of expectation when the second non-informing mode transition effect is executed than when the third non-informing mode transition effect is executed. It becomes possible. Also, in the high base state, if the 15R first big hit, the 12R second big hit, the 12R third big hit, or the 7R fourth big hit, when the 15R sixth big hit in the high base state described above. Since the same ending period is set, the description is omitted. In addition, when the 2R seventh big hit occurs without low probability time saving (low-probability low base state), the ending period is set to be the same as the 2R seventh big hit in the high base state described above. Is omitted. In addition, when there is no low probability time saving (low-probability low base state), when the 2R eighth big hit occurs, the ending period is set to be the same as when the 2R eighth big hit occurs in the high base state described above. Is omitted. In addition, the 2R eighth big hit is a "V non-passing big hit (also called "V non-passing big hit")", and the high-probability state ends with this big hit. Therefore, similarly to the above, it is preferable that the period for informing such a disadvantageous period is short, and therefore the shortest period (3900 ms) is set. The following reasons can be given as one of the reasons why the ending period is not changed based on the specific area information during the time saving. That is, since the big hit during the time saving is the big hit after the second time (so-called condominium), the player becomes accustomed to the game and the game progresses according to the schedule of the "V passing big hit" or "V non-passing big hit". Since the possibility is very high, the ending period may not be changed based on the specific area information.

Further, in S2105, when it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), since the final round in the jackpot game has ended, it is determined whether or not the ending presentation execution time of the jackpot has elapsed ( If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S2122) (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is ended. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) will be executed again as the special figure operation process (FIG. 20).

Here, in the specific area effective period setting process (S2110), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is effective for the V round, that is, for a predetermined period after the opening of the second special winning opening 35 in the second round is started ( It is set to a period (also referred to as an “effective period” or a “first period”) when it is determined that the privilege is given. Then, the period other than the valid period is set to a period (also referred to as “invalid period” or “second period”) in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid (non-granting of privilege). Further, during the valid period of the specific area 39, the execution mode of the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 (V attacker) in the V round and the opening pattern of the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35 (V attacker) ( Execution mode of the opening/closing operation pattern of the movable piece).

Specifically, the period during which the passage of the specific area is valid, that is, the period when the gaming state after the jackpot game is high probability state (the period when the privilege is given) by passing the game ball through the specific region is , As shown in FIGS. 51 to 52. FIG. 51 is a timing chart of the second round of the 2R eighth big hit, the 7R fifth big hit, and the 12R third big hit, that is, the V round (the second special winning opening 35 is opened). The 2R eighth big hit, the 7R fifth big hit, and the 12R third big hit are "V non-passing big hits" in which the game ball is not scheduled to pass through the specific area 39 during the big hit game. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the V round (the opening pattern of the V attacker), the opening pattern of the short opening with a short opening time (the second opening pattern) is selected.

Then, along with this, the specific area opening/closing pattern is executed, and the specific area effective period setting process is executed. First, when the V attacker is opened, the V round (second round) is started and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is started. As shown in FIG. 51, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern starts from the closed state. After the lapse of 80 ms in the closed state, the state changes to the open state (movable piece 150 operates and changes from (a) to (b) in FIG. 47), and after 80 ms in the open state (after 160 ms in total) Then, it changes to the closed state. On the other hand, this short open release pattern closes the V attacker only by opening it for 100 ms and ends the V round (second round). Then, an interval period of 2000 ms is set. The specific region opening/closing operation pattern is supposed to end at the end of this V round interval period (2000 ms). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, after the opening for 80 ms is completed, the specific region opening/closing operation pattern is completed after the closed state for 1940 ms. As a result, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is completed without executing the subsequent opening operation for a maximum of 26000 ms (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, the valid period of the specific area is started after the V round is started and at the timing when the specific area is first opened. That is, 80 ms in the closed state after the start of the V round and before the specific region is opened (before the movable piece starts operating) is an invalid period. Then, thereafter, during execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern, the period during which the specific area is opened is set to the valid period. However, it is invalid during the retry operation. In addition to this, when the specific region is switched from the open state to the closed state, a period of 900 ms (this period is also referred to as an “extra period”) after the closed state is maintained as the valid period. This is, when closing the movable piece 150, enters the specific area 39 just before closing the specific area 39, and the entered game ball is actually detected by the specific area sensor 39a. This is because there is a possibility that the area may be closed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the open state is switched to the closed state, it is effective for a certain period of time after the closed state, even during or after the execution of the specific region opening/closing operation pattern. It has a period. In FIG. 51, after the valid period (extra period) of 900 ms has passed, there is no period in which the specific region is in the open state (excluding the execution period of the retry operation), so that it is also the invalid period thereafter.

Next, using FIG. 52, the second round of the 15R first jackpot, the 12R second jackpot, the 7R fourth jackpot, the 15R sixth jackpot, and the 2R seventh jackpot, that is, the V round (the second jackpot 35 The specific area effective period setting process will be described with reference to the timing chart of (opening). This 15R 1st big hit, 12R 2nd big hit, 7R 4th big hit, 15R 6th big hit, and 2R 7th big hit, the game ball is planned to pass the specific area 39 during the big hit game "V pass The planned big hit." Therefore, as the opening pattern of the special winning opening in the V round (the opening pattern of the V attacker), the opening pattern of the long opening having a long opening time (first opening pattern) is selected.

Then, along with this, the specific area opening/closing pattern is executed, and the specific area effective period setting process is executed. Similarly to the above, when the V attacker (the second special winning opening 35) is opened, the V round (second round) is started and the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is started. Unlike the short opening, the opening pattern of the long opening of FIG. 52 opens the V attacker for 16000 ms to bring it into the closed state, but after that, opening and closing are repeated and the opening pattern continues. Then, all of the long opening release patterns set in the V round (second round) such as the 15R first jackpot described above are executed, or the regulation set in the V round (second round) in the V round. The V round (2 rounds) is supposed to be finished when the number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is entered or any one of the ending conditions is satisfied. On the other hand, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is 2 unless a specified number of game balls enter during 840 ms (that is, 1000 ms after the start of the big hit game) after the first open state (80 ms). The second open state (maximum 26000 ms) is executed. Since the firing speed of the game balls is about 1 ball per 600 ms, it is practically impossible to enter 10 game balls within 1000 ms.

As a result, in the specific area valid period setting process, after the initial open state (80 ms) of the specific area 39 is finished, the extra period is maintained for the 900 ms valid period and then set to the invalid state. Then, after 1940 ms has passed the invalid state, the valid period is set in accordance with the specific region 39 being opened for the second time. Then, as shown in FIG. 52, the specific area opening/closing operation pattern ends when the V round ends and the interval period (2000 ms) related to the V round ends. Since the specific area opening/closing operation pattern is closed at the same time as the end, in the specific area effective period setting process, an extra period of 900 ms is set as an effective period after the closed state and then switched to an invalid period. ..

Here, at a timing when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned on (that is, at a timing when the game area is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the effective period), the game state indicator 46 is displayed in a predetermined manner. As a mode, the fact that the game state after the big hit game is in a high probability state is notified. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). Also, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the big hit game and the V flag is turned on, the display mode of "a1*a2*a3*" is displayed. Then, when the big hit game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode of "a1□a2□a3□" is displayed. Further, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such a timing, and during the big hit game, the display mode of "a1□a2□a3□" remains as it is even if the game ball passes through the specific area. The display mode of "a1□a2□a3□" may be set at the timing of shifting to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit game, and "a1□a2□a3□" at the timing of shifting from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. ..

That is, in the specific area sensor detection processing (FIG. 36) described later, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and the V outside the effective period (V invalid). The V flag is not turned on when the V passage is detected during the period). If the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (gaming state setting process (FIG. 35) described later). By doing so, the V flag is not turned on based on the V passage due to the illegal act, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to the high probability state.

[Winning prize closing process]
Next, the special winning opening closing process (also referred to as "confirmation process") will be described with reference to FIG. The special winning opening closing process (S2115) is a process performed at the end of each round in the special electric auditors product process (big hit game). In the special winning opening closing process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the closing process flag is ON (S2701), and when it is determined that the closing process flag is not ON (NO in S2701), the closing process flag is turned ON (S2702). , The interval period is started (S2703), and the process proceeds to S2704. As a result, the closing process flag indicating that the closing process is being executed is turned on, and measurement of the interval period (2000 ms or 200 ms) set after the round is started. Further, the interval period is set according to the round to be ended.

Specifically, when the ending round is the first round or the second round, 2000 ms is set as the interval period, and when the ending round is the third round or later, the interval period is set to 200 ms. Further, when the special winning opening closing process ends, the closing process flag is turned off. On the other hand, if the closing process flag is ON in S2701, that is, if it is determined that the special winning opening closing process is being executed (YES in S2701), the process directly proceeds to S2704.

In S2704, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (S2704), and if it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is being measured (NO in S2704), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S2704), then it is determined whether or not it has ended in the first round (S2705). When it is determined that the process is completed in the first round (YES in S2705), a process for determining whether or not the number of discharge/emission matches is executed (S2708), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2705 that the end is not the first round (NO in S2705), then it is determined whether the end is in the second round, that is, the V round (S2706). If it is determined in S2706 that the second round is finished (YES in S2706), the specific area opening/closing operation is finished (S2707), and the process proceeds to S2708.

As a result, the opening/closing operation of the specific region 39 (opening/closing operation of the movable piece 150) in the V round is completed. That is, the specific area opening/closing operation that starts at the start of the V round ends at the end of the interval period related to the V round after the end of the V round. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2706 that the end is not in the second round, that is, the end is in the third round or later (NO in S2706), the closing process flag is set to OFF (S2709), and the process is executed. Finish. That is, after the third round, if only the interval period (200 ms) set after the round ends, the closing process flag is turned off and the special winning opening closing process ends. That is, in the big winning opening closing processing of the third and subsequent rounds, the winning/discharging number matching determination processing and the specific area opening/closing operation ending processing are not executed.

In S2708, it is determined whether the number of game balls that entered the special winning opening (second special winning opening 35) during the round and the number of the game balls that entered the ball are discharged from the special winning opening. An input/discharge number matching determination process is performed (S2708), and the process ends. The process of determining whether the number of coins matches the number of coins (S2708) is a round that is executed before the V round and opens the same V attacker (the second big winning opening 35) as the V round (a non-specific round). ) Which is the first round and the second round which is the V round (specific round), and the subsequent rounds (the third and subsequent rounds), even the V attacker is released. But not done. In the V round, since the movable piece for opening and closing the specific area 39 in the V attacker is operated, there is a possibility that the game ball is clogged with the movable piece and the game ball is clogged in the attacker. Therefore, the number of incoming balls and the number of outgoing balls are managed to check whether there is a ball clogging. In addition, when passing through a specific area due to a fraudulent activity such as so-called fishing line goto, the number of incoming balls and the number of ejected balls do not match, so fraudulent activity is discovered and unexpected damage is prevented. It is also possible.

In addition, the process of determining whether the number of coins has been discharged or discharged in the first round is performed to confirm whether or not there is a ball clogging before the execution of the V round that is first executed in the big hit game. If the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls match at the end of this first round, the second round V can be started while confirming that there is no ball clogging. If the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls do not match at the end of one round, retry processing (also referred to as "movable member operation processing") or error notification will be performed to start the V round before starting. It is also possible to eliminate ball clogging. In this way, the V round can be normally executed by performing the input/discharge number coincidence determination processing in the first round and the second round. In addition, in the round after the V round that is finally executed in the big hit game, that is, in the rounds after the third round (after the end of the V round), the input/discharge number matching determination process is not performed, and the interval period It is possible to set a short period (200 ms) and quickly execute a big hit game.

[Incoming/outgoing number matching judgment processing]
Next, the input/discharge number matching determination process (S2708) will be described with reference to FIG. In the winning/discharging number coincidence determination processing (S2708), first, in a predetermined round, the number of gaming balls (the number of gaming balls) that has entered the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 35) and the number of gaming balls that have been discharged ( (Number of emissions) is determined (S2801). This winning/discharging number matching determination processing (also referred to as “matching determination processing”) is performed only in the first round and second round large winning opening closing processing. In both the first round and the second round, the second special winning opening 35 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening pattern. Therefore, in the corresponding round (1 round or 2 rounds), the number of balls that enter the second special winning opening 35 and the number of balls that are discharged from the second special winning opening 35 (the second special winning device 36) are It is to determine whether they match.

FIG. 47 is a schematic view showing the second big winning device 36. The game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 35 are all passed through a predetermined game ball guiding passage in the second special winning device, and the second special winning opening sensor 35a (“the entrance detecting means” or the “entering ball”). (Also referred to as a detection sensor). That is, the second special winning opening sensor 35a is a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening 35, and the second big winning opening sensor 35a is based on the detection by the second special winning opening sensor 35a. It is possible to count the number of balls entering the mouth 35. When a game ball is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 35a, the number of entered balls counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 counts and stores the number of entered balls.

In addition, the game ball detected by (passed through) the second special winning opening sensor 35a then passes through a predetermined game ball guide passage and is always either the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a. Pass through. That is, the specific area sensor 39a (also referred to as the "second discharge detecting means" or the "second discharge detecting sensor") and the non-specific area sensor 49a (also referred to as the "first discharge detecting means" or the "first discharge detecting sensor"). Is a sensor for detecting the discharge of the game ball from the second special winning opening 35, and the discharge from the second special winning opening 35 based on the detection of the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detecting sensor 49a. It becomes possible to count the number. When the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area detection sensor 49a, the discharge number counting means (not shown) provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 counts and stores the discharge number. In addition, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area detection sensor 49a that detect that the game ball that entered the second special winning opening is discharged are also collectively referred to as "discharge detecting means" or "discharge detecting sensor".

In this embodiment, the number of incoming balls counting means and the number of discharging counting means are provided to separately count the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. It is also possible to adopt an aspect in which an input/output number counting means is provided, and the count value is increased/decreased each time a ball is introduced or discharged. In such a mode, the initial value is set to "0", and when the count value is "1", it indicates that the number of incoming balls is one more than the number of outgoing balls. It indicates that the number is one more than the number, and in the case of “0”, it is possible that the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged are the same.

A movable piece 150 (also referred to as a "movable member") is provided inside the second special winning opening 35. When the movable piece 150 is in the closed state, the second special winning opening sensor 35a is installed. The game ball that has passed is guided to the non-specific area side, passes through the non-specific area sensor 49a, and is discharged to the outside of the second big winning device (see FIG. 47(a)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 150 is in the open state, the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening sensor 35a is guided to the specific area side, passes through the specific area sensor 39a, and goes out of the second special winning apparatus. It will be discharged (see FIG. 47(b)).

Then, in S2801, by comparing the count value of the above-described incoming ball number counting means and the count value of the discharge number counting means, whether the count values match, the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls during the round Are determined to match. Next, when it is determined in S2802 that the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged match (YES in S2802), it is determined whether or not error notification is being executed (S2803). If it is determined in S2803 that the error notification is not being executed (NO in S2803), the closing process flag is turned off (S2804), and the process ends. That is, if the numbers of winning and discharging are the same and the error notification is not being executed, the special winning opening closing process of the corresponding round is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error notification is being executed (YES in S2803), the error notification is ended (S2805), the closing processing flag is turned off (S2804), and the processing is ended. This means that the match determination is performed again during the execution of the error notification (S2809) described below, and if it is determined that the two match, the error notification being executed is terminated halfway and the closing processing flag is turned off. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the error notification from being unnecessarily continued for a long period of time, even though the abnormality is resolved.

When it is determined in S2802 that the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls do not match (NO in S2802), it is then determined whether or not it is time to execute the retry operation (S2806). In the present embodiment, as shown in the reference timing chart of the V round shown in FIG. 50, the coincidence determination of the number of inputs and discharges is from t1 (2100 ms from the start of the round) to t2 (29000 ms from the start of the round) according to the end timing of the V round. Will be executed at any timing within the range. Then, if it is determined that they do not match in the match determination, a retry operation of 300 ms is executed after 1500 ms has elapsed from the execution timing of the match determination. Then, after 900 ms have elapsed since the retry operation ended, error notification of 10000 ms is executed, the error notification is ended thereafter, the special winning opening closing process is ended (completed), and the process moves to the next round.

When it is determined in S2806 that it is not the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (NO in S2806), it is then determined whether it is the execution time (start time) of the error notification (S2808). When it is determined in S2808 that it is not the time to execute the error notification (NO in S2808), it is determined whether it is the time to end the error notification (S2810). If it is determined in S2810 that it is not the end time of error notification (NO in S2810), the process ends. For example, if this is the period before the retry operation is started (the period of 900 ms+600 ms) after it is determined that the above-described mismatch occurs, the number of input/output numbers is determined again by executing the input/output number coincidence determination process. If it is determined that they match, the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that they do not match, it is determined again whether it is the time to execute the retry operation. The same applies hereinafter.

In this way, since the input/output number matching determination processing is repeatedly executed at a predetermined interrupt cycle, the first input/output number matching determination is executed at the end of the interval period of the chance round (1 round and 2 rounds). During the period until the retry operation is executed, a plurality of input/output number matching determinations including the first determination are performed. Then, if it is determined that they coincide with each other in the second and subsequent coincidence determinations, the subsequent processing (retry operation and error notification) is not executed, the closing processing flag is turned off, and the processing ends. Further, the end of the interval period coincides with the end of the specific area opening/closing pattern, and if the state when ending the specific area opening/closing pattern is the open state, the specific area opening/closing pattern is ended. An extra period of 900 ms is provided after the closed state.

As described above, the extra period is treated as valid passage through the specific area 39. That is, since the extra period may be set after the first coincidence of the input/discharge numbers is determined (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 52), it is determined that the extra coincidence is not made in the first coincidence of the input/discharge numbers. Then, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the extra period, it is determined as a mismatch by the match determination of the number of discharges and insertions although the game is originally a normal game. Even in such a case, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to perform a plurality of input/output number coincidence determinations before the retry operation is performed, it is determined that the same input/discharge number coincidence determination is performed before the retry operation is performed. It is possible to end the special winning opening closing process without performing a retry operation or error notification. Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of times of coincidence of the number of inputs and discharges is executed during 900 ms of the extra period, it is more reliable when the game ball passes through the specific region or the non-specific region during the extra period. It is possible to quickly complete the special winning opening closing processing without performing unnecessary processing (retry operation and error notification).

Further, in the present embodiment, due to the interrupt period, the input/discharge number coincidence determination is executed even after the end of the extra period and before the start of the retry operation (600 ms). It is possible to reliably execute the coincidence/injection number determination process before performing the retry operation or the error notification in a state in which the game ball is surely reflected. In addition, if it is determined that there is a mismatch in the input/discharge count matching determination during this extra period or the subsequent 600 ms period, it is possible that a ball clogging or the like has occurred. Perform a retry operation. This retry operation pattern is preferably different from the specific area opening/closing operation pattern. In the present embodiment, because of the interrupt cycle, it is possible to perform a plurality of input/discharge number coincidence determinations after the retry operation and before the error notification is executed (900 ms). When the ball clogging or the like is resolved, it is determined to be a match by the match determination of the number of deposits and discharges before the error notification, and it is possible to complete the special winning opening closing process without notifying the error. In addition, since it is possible to perform a plurality of coincidence determinations of the number of deposits and discharges during the execution of the error notification, it is possible to end the error notification at the timing when it is determined that they are coincident and to complete the special winning opening closing process. Become. As a result, it is possible to provide game control that does not cause the player to feel uneasy without performing unnecessary error processing. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the input/discharge number coincidence determination does not result in a match even after the execution period of the error notification has elapsed, the end of a predetermined error notification period (10,000 ms in this embodiment) causes a large error. The closing of the prize-winning mouth has been completed, and it is possible to move to the next round. During the error notification of 10000 ms, the game shop side can confirm the game machine and take some measures to take measures so that the normal game can be continued. Also, there is no ball clogging, etc., and there is a case where it is judged as inconsistent by the coincidence judgment of the number of inputs and discharges due to the occurrence of noise etc.In such a case, the game is not stopped unnecessarily and the time elapses. With this, the error can be canceled and the game can be restarted quickly.

If it is determined in S2806 that it is the execution time (start time) of the retry operation (YES in S2806), the retry operation is executed (S2807), and the process is ended. If it is determined in S2808 that it is time to execute error notification (YES in S2808), error notification is executed (S2809), and the process ends. If it is determined that it is time to end the error notification (YES in S2810), the error notification is ended (S2811), the closing processing flag is turned off (S2812), and the processing is ended. By turning off the closing process flag, it is possible to indicate that the special winning opening closing process is completed.

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in a specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 36) described later. When it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to "10000" (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). The time saving flag is turned on (S2205), the time saving counter is set to "10000" (S2206), and the process is completed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to the high probability state is determined based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state setting process. ing.

Here, when the V flag is ON, the number of times the probability variation counter is set is the number of times that the special symbol win/loss determination with high probability can be executed. The value of "10000" times is practically the next big hit in consideration of the big hit probability in the high probability state, the business hours of the game store on one day, and the number of times of special symbol hit/miss determination that can be executed within the business hours. It is the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until it occurs or until business hours end. Therefore, when the V flag is turned on and the high probability state is set, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (substantially the same). Further, when the probability variation flag is ON, the time saving counter is also set to "10000" times, so that the time saving state (open extension state) is also set during this high probability state. It can be said. As in the present embodiment, the probability variation counter and the time saving counter may be set to "10000" times so that the high accuracy high base state is set substantially until the next time, or the V flag is turned on. In such a case, a control may be adopted in which the highly accurate and high base state is set until the next big hit actually occurs without setting the value in the counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the 7R fifth big hit is ended without turning on the probability variation flag (S2207). In S2207, it is not the 7R fifth big hit that has ended, that is, the other big hits shown in FIG. 6 (15R first big hit, 12R second big hit, 12R third big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 15R sixth big hit, 2R big hit, 2R big hit) When it is determined that it is a 7-big hit or a 2R eighth big hit) (NO in S2207), the time saving flag is turned on (S2208), "100" is set to the time saving counter (S2209), and the processing is ended. .. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state (that is, a low-probability high base state). This low accurate high base state, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times (the special symbol hit determination is performed 100 times), and the next big hit occurs, the end by the establishment of any of the conditions To do. In addition, the time saving counter and the probability variation counter are for counting the number of times of the variation display number of the first special symbol and the variation display number of the second special symbol. In this way, even if the "V passing big jackpot" such as the 15R first big jackpot, if there is no passing of a specific area during the V round due to some reason such as no game ball being shot, a high probability state is set. Without being set, it becomes a time saving state (low accurate high base state).

If it is determined in S2207 that the 7R fifth big hit has ended (YES in S2207), the process ends without turning on the probability variation flag or turning on the time saving flag. That is, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit, when the V flag is OFF (specific area not passed (also referred to as “non-passage of specific area”)), the gaming state after the big hit game is a low probability state and Set to low base state (low accurate low base state).

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) after the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area sensor 39a detects a game ball (S2401). If it is determined in S2401 that there is no detection by the specific area sensor 39a (NO in S2401), the process ends. When it is determined in S2401 that there is detection by the specific area sensor 39a (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the specific area is valid (S2402). The specific region effective period is a period set in the specific region effective period setting process (S2110) in the special electric auditors product process (FIG. 32) described above. The specific area effective period is set to the second round (V round) in the big hit game.

If it is determined in S2402 that the specific area (specific area sensor) is in the valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned on (S2403), and the specific area passing command is set (S2404). Finish the process. The CPU of the main control board 80, by the output process (S201), transmits this specific area passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub control board 90 is based on the received specific area passing command A predetermined game effect is executed in the display area or the like.

If it is determined in S2402 that the specific region (specific region sensor) is not in the valid period (is the invalid period) (NO in S2402), the invalid period passing command is set without turning on the V flag ( (S2405), the process ends. When the specific area is passed during the invalid period, a predetermined error display may be displayed on the display device or the like that can be controlled by the main control unit. Further, the CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this invalid period pass command to the sub control substrate 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control substrate 90, based on the received invalid period pass command, A predetermined error notification may be given using the image display device 7, the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the speaker 67, or the like.

[Processing when starting the ball]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-up ball entry process (S208) after the specific region sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 37, in the starting ball entering process (S208), first, the special figure 1 reserved number of balls, the special figure 2 reserved number of balls and the normal symbol reserved number of balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the special map 2 number of reserved balls has increased by “1” (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of special balls 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number in S307 in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) in the immediately preceding starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the second special figure pending storage unit is read ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination obtained at the time of entering the starting opening (random value for determination of special symbol validity), depending on the current game state (low probability state, high probability state) Determine whether it is a big hit or a miss. If the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-determination (so-called "holding") for determining whether or not the special figure 2 is held (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) prior to the hit determination (S1303, S1309) in the later-described special figure 2 hit/miss determination processing (S1202). This is equivalent to "look-ahead".

The pre-judgment is performed by using the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state in the high probability state and the normal hit state in the normal state (low probability state). It is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table. Further, as another pre-determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a fluctuation pattern information determination table of. Then, in the preliminary determination, based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining the special symbol) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state, predetermined variation pattern information is selected. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, a big hit type, whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S2505, the game information including at least the reserved ball number data relating to the second special symbol read in S2501 and the information pre-determined in S2504 (preliminary determination information) is generated as a special figure 2 starting entry command. , Is set in the output buffer for sending a command to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). Incidentally, as the special figure 2 start ball input command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S2503 may be directly transmitted to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted. May not be transmitted as it is, and the game information (for example, the above-mentioned variation pattern information) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

Also, by analyzing the special figure 2 start incoming ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 in the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information related to a big hit, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is a big hit type The sub-control unit 90 can identify any of the above. In addition, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering ball command, whether or not the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number is a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and whether it is low or not. It is possible to specify whether or not to be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start-up ball input command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the result is low probability. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect holding information which is determined to be a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for special symbol validity determination out of the acquired random number values read in S2503 is not sent to the sub-control unit as it is, but the value of the other big hit type determination random number counter (big hit Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value), and the information indicating the result of the preliminary determination is generated and set as the Toku-zu 2 start entrance command. It is possible.

Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” as in the case of the above-described special diagram 2 (S2506). If it is determined in S2506 that the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number in S311 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing ends. On the other hand, in S2507, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process in S2508 and subsequent steps. Here, when the time saving flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is the high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second starting opening 21 is operating, and whether or not the special figure 2 is true or false. It is in a state in which the determination (see FIG. 8B) is easy to be made. In the first embodiment, as will be described later, the special figure 2 hold digestion (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed prior to the special figure 1 hold digestion (variation display of the first special symbol). (So-called special figure 2 priority changer). In such a configuration, for example, when the pre-judgment of Toku-zu 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and the result of the pre-judgment is clearly indicated as a big hit, the player, By using the priority of special figure 2 hold digestion, intentionally remove special figure 2 hold at any timing (set to "0"), and intend to make a big hit according to special figure 1 showing the result of pre-determination. It is possible to technically intervene, such as by automatically generating it. It is not preferable for the player to adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big hit from the viewpoint of fairness of the game. For this reason, when the current game state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), the process relating to the preliminary determination of the special figure 1 after S2508 is not performed, and this process is ended.

The processes of S2508 to S2510 are the same as those of S316 to S318 described above with respect to Toku-zu 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S2508), Preliminary determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S2509), and the game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the first special symbol read in S2501 and the information predetermined in S2509 (preliminary determination information), It is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command and is set in the output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). The pre-determination (holding prefetch) in S2509 is performed prior to the success/failure determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 success/failure determination processing (S1207) described later.

[Power interruption monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S209) after the reserved ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 38, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if a power-off signal is input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a winning game, the number of holding balls, and the number of remaining fluctuations of probability change/time reduction are some. Data relating to the above) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter the loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. Note that the counter, flags, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main processing shown in FIG. 39 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. .. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the content of the RAM of the sub control board 90 is normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the content of the RAM is not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. When the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses and counter values are reset. The steps S4001 to S4003 are executed only once (when the power is turned on) after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are disabled. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update processing (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random numbers for effect determination include a random number for predictive effect determination that determines an advance effect and a random number for effect symbol determination that determines an effect design. The method of updating the random number can be the same as the method of updating the random number performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating, the random number values may be incremented by 2 instead of being incremented by 1. The random number for effect determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. The timing is, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) for notifying that there is a start ball entry from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying start of variation from the main control board 80). When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern to be described later is determined, this can be done. The storage location of the obtained random numbers for effect determination is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) in accordance with the received command. Production (production design game production, special game production related to the big hit game, etc.) is executed. The production control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits interruption (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, operation of the movable decorative member. It is possible to perform control, control voice output from the speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
In the reception interrupt process (S4008), as shown in FIG. 40, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is sent to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not it has been input (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the processing is ended. .. The reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed prior to the other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 41, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). .. Subsequently, a ramp data output process for outputting the ramp data created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later is performed (S4202). Next, drive data output processing for outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source) is performed (S4203). This drive data is also created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 42, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4301) and a specific effect start process (S4302) described later are performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process of storing the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S4303), and the switch stored by the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number is executed (S4305).

[Reception command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the received command analysis processing (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not a start-ball entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4395), and it is determined that the start-ball entry command has not been received. If it is (NO in S4395), the process proceeds to S4401, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4395), the effect hold information storage process (S4400) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4401. .. The production hold information storage processing (S4400) is performed by various information (preliminary determination result, jackpot type determination random number) included in the start-in ball command (special figure 1 start-in ball command or special figure 2 start-in ball command) received in S4395. Numerical value, game information such as fluctuation pattern random value), depending on the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the start/end command transmission/reception (when command is generated) special symbol holding balls , Is stored in a predetermined effect holding information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, when the received starting ball entering command is the special figure 1 starting ball entering command corresponding to the number of reserved balls “4” in the special figure 1, the pre-determination result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball entering command. Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect hold information in an area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect holding information thus stored is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect holding information storage area in the sub-control board 90 (effect holding information) is the special figure reservation storage section (first special figure reservation storage section, second special figure) in the main control board (main control section) 80 described above. This is the same as the stored content (acquired information) in the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub control board 90 is also an “acquired information storage means”.

In S4401, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4401), a fluctuation effect start process (S4402) described later is performed. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), the process proceeds to S4406 and the process proceeds to S4406 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4406, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4406), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4406), the effect design is stopped and displayed to make the fluctuation effect. Varying effect end processing for ending is performed (S4407). In the fluctuating effect ending process (S4407), the fluctuating effect ending command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. When the variation effect end command that has been set is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 variably displays the effect pattern 8 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is stopped and displayed, and the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4406 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4406), the process proceeds to S4408 without performing the fluctuation effect ending process. The variable effect refers to various effects that are performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol.

Succeedingly, in S4408, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main control board 80 (S4408), and when it is determined that the opening command is received (YES in S4408), in the special game (big hit game) Special game effect selection processing for selecting the pattern (effect mode) of the special game effect to be executed is executed (S4409). The special game performance is at least the opening performance that is executed during the opening period before the opening of the special winning opening (before the start of the first round) accompanying the start of the special game, and the round game during the special game (big hit game) (large prize) Round effect (big hit game effect) to be executed in accordance with the progress of the mouth ball game) is included. In the first embodiment, the opening command according to the type of the big hit is transmitted from the main control board 80, and the length of the opening period (opening time) is specified by the opening command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, the opening time is 1900 ms (1.9 seconds) when the types of big hits are the 7R fourth big hit and the 7R fifth big hit, and the other big hits are 8,000 ms (8 seconds). Is becoming The reason why the opening time of 7R 4th big hit and 7R 5th big hit is shorter than other big hits is that in case of 7R 4th big hit and 7R 5th big hit, "VS chance production" described later is performed. This is because in the "VS chance production", the player is not clearly informed of the occurrence of the big hit, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the start timing (start of the first round) of the big hit game. Then, in the special game effect selection processing (S4409), there is an effect pattern of the selected special game effect (opening effect, round effect, etc.) and information based on the received opening command (type of opening command, opening time, start timing). The special game start time command that can specify the big hit type related to the big hit game is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the special game start command thus set is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the special game effect according to the progress of the big hit game on the image display device 7 Is executed on the display screen 7a.

Here, more specifically, when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit, 12R second big hit or 12R third big hit in a low-probability timeless state, a set opening time (8000 ms) is used. Then, an effect (starting effect) that allows the player to easily recognize that the big hit game is about to be started (starting effect) is executed, and then a predetermined round effect (big hit game effect) is started with the start of the first round in the big hit game. To start. As this start effect, for example, characters such as "Congratulations", "big hit" and "probably strange big hit" are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or the big hit game is started (a lot of prize balls). There is a mode in which an image is displayed so as to give an impression that a game in which the game can be acquired starts. On the other hand, when the type of big hit is the 7R fourth big hit and the 7R fifth big hit, the opening time is set to 1900 ms (1.9 seconds), and at this opening time, the player can easily recognize the start of the big hit game. No special production (start production as described above) is performed.

As a result, it is easy to recognize that the big hit game starts, compared to the effect executed in the opening period of 8000 ms such as the 15R first big hit compared to the effect executed in the opening period of 19000 ms such as the 7R fifth big hit. It is considered as possible production. Also, after the start effect executed by using the opening period of 8000 ms such as the 15R first big hit, a round effect separate from this start effect is started again, so the big hit game also starts from this point. It is easily recognizable. Here, at least the effect executed during the big hit game may be referred to as "special effect". For example, the round effect started after the end of the 15R first jackpot start effect may be the “first special effect”.

Further, in the case of the 7R fourth big hit and the 7R fifth big hit, in the opening period, instead of executing the start effect that allows the player to easily recognize that the big hit game is started, the “VS chance” described below is executed. It is said that "directing" is performed. Since this "VS chance effect" does not directly notify that the big hit game is started, the player starts the big hit game as compared with the start effect of the 15R first big hit or the first special effect. Is said to be difficult to recognize. The "VS chance effect" can be started during execution of the variable display of the identification information relating to the 7R fourth big hit or the 7R fifth big hit. Also, since it is executed as a series of effects from the midway display of the variation of the identification information to the midst of the big hit game (until the big hit game ends), depending on the player, an impression as if the variation display of the identification information continues. You may receive it. This makes it difficult for the player to notice the start of the big hit game. For example, the "VS chance effect" that starts from the middle of the variation display of the 7R fifth jackpot identification information and continues to be executed during the opening period (1.9S) and the jackpot game may be the "second special effect". .. Further, the "VS chance effect" executed at the time of the 7R fourth big hit may be the "third special effect".

In particular, when the game state is a state without low probability time saving (normal state), when the 7R fifth big hit, compared to other big hits (15R big hit, 12R big hit), the amount of profit that can be obtained (the number of prize balls) In addition to the small number, the game state after the big hit game is finished is a state without a low probability time saving (normal state). Moreover, since it is a "big hit not to pass through the specific area", the high probability state does not occur. On the other hand, when other big hits (15R big hit, 12R big hit, etc.), the gaming state after the big hit game is a highly accurate high base state (high probability state) or a low certainty high base state (time saving state). Is set to. In other words, as a big hit (related to the special symbol 1) that usually occurs in a low probability time saving state, the 7R fifth big hit can be said to be a big hit with the lowest profit compared to other big hits. When the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a jackpot is the 7R fifth jackpot, the player is not a little discouraged, and in the worst case, the player's willingness to play may be reduced. The possibility becomes even more remarkable when the big hit finally obtained after playing for a long time is the 7R fifth big hit.

Therefore, as described above, by making it difficult for the player to understand the start of the big hit game related to the 7R fifth big hit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation and to maintain and improve the interest of the game. Further, a player who does not notice the start of the big hit game related to the 7R fifth big hit is in a special game state in which a predetermined amount of game profit (prize ball) can be obtained even though the big hit game is not started. You may think that In such a case, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game, though the big hit game with low profit is executed. In addition, regarding the big hit game related to the 7R fourth big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high-accuracy high base state, but the amount of earned profit is small compared to other big hits, so this is also the big hit game. It becomes possible to exert a certain effect by making it difficult to recognize the start of. In addition, since the game state after the execution of the second special effect related to the 7R fifth big hit (after the end of the big hit game) is a low-probability low base state (normal state), in this second special effect, the special symbol hit or not It is also possible to execute an effect that is the same as the effect that is executed when the result of the determination is out. As a result, it is possible to further increase the possibility that the player receives the impression that the identification information is being variably displayed while the second special effect is being executed. In addition, since the game state after execution of the third special effect related to the 7R fourth big hit (after the big hit game is finished) is a highly accurate high base state (high probability state), in this third special effect, a special symbol It is also possible to execute an effect that is the same as the effect that is executed when the result of the hit determination is a win.

Here, the "common effect" includes effects that are different from each other in the effects executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 but are in the same effect, or the same effect. .. In addition, "the same part of the effect" includes an effect using the character image of the same character and an effect using the same image data (the difference in only the display size is included in the same effect). .. "Some effects are different" means, for example, that the character images executed in the effect are the same, but the display mode and color of the background are different, or the character images are the same, but the presence or absence of the display of the design (effect design). It is possible to cite different aspects.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ending command is received from the main control board 80 (S4410), and when it is determined that the ending command is received (YES in S4410), the special game end effect (ending effect) pattern or special An ending effect selection process for selecting the type of effect mode after the game is finished (S4411), and the process of S4412 (FIG. 44) is performed. In the first embodiment, an ending command is transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the type of big hit and whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 39 during the big hit game (second round). The length of the ending period (ending time) is specified by the ending command. For example, as shown in FIG. 48, as a result of the special symbol hit determination in the low-probability low-base state, the ending time when the type of the big hit is the 15R first big hit and the 15R sixth big hit is the game ball to the specific area 39. If there is a passage, it will be 17,000 ms (17 seconds), and if there is no passage of the game ball to the specific area 39, it will be 8000 ms (8 seconds). Details of the difference between the ending times of the 15R first big hit and the 15R sixth big hit will be described later.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as a result of the special symbol hit determination in the low-probability low-base state, the ending time when the type of the big hit is 12R second big hit and 12R third big hit, the game ball to the specific area 39 The same 8000 ms (8 seconds) is used with and without passing, and the content of the ending effect to be executed (ending effect pattern) is the same. In this way, the ending time and the ending effect are the same regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 39. That is, after the big hit game related to the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit, "probability non-notification state (non This is because the notification mode)” is generated. That is, as described above, for the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit, the type of the big hit is determined based on the opening mode (opening pattern) of the special winning opening during the big hit game, the effect related to the big hit, and the like. Is difficult for players. Then, the gaming state after the big hit game related to the 12R second big hit and the 12R third big hit becomes a "high-probability-high base state" or a "low-probability-high base state", but is a high base state for the player. This is a "probability non-reporting state" in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is a high-probability state although it is recognizable. The ending time and the ending effect are the same in order to improve the playability and the enjoyment of the game in the "probability non-notification state". The same applies to the 2R seventh big hit and the 2R eighth big hit.

Then, in the ending effect selection processing (S4411), the effect pattern of the selected ending effect and information based on the received ending command (ending command type, ending time, type of jackpot related to the jackpot game that has ended, after jackpot game end The special game end time command capable of specifying the effect mode of (1) is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the special game end command that has been set is transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 displays the effect related to the end of the big hit game on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Run on On the other hand, if it is determined in S4408 that the opening command has not been received (NO in S4408), the process proceeds to S4410 without performing special game effect selection processing, and it is determined that the ending command has not been received in S4410. In the case (NO in S4410), the process proceeds to S4412 (FIG. 44) without performing the ending effect selection process.

In S4412, it is determined whether a specific area passage command is received from the main control board 80 (S4412), and when it is determined that the specific area passage command is received (YES in S4412), the specific area is within the specific area valid period. When it is determined that the V passage flag indicating that the game ball has passed (V passage) to 39 is turned on (S4413), the process proceeds to S4414, and the specific area passage command is not received (S4412). NO), the process proceeds to S4414 without turning on the V passage flag. When the V pass flag is turned on in S4413, a V pass designation command for notifying that there is V pass is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90. When the set V passage designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines that the big hit game being executed is the 15R first big hit or the 15R sixth big hit. If it is a big hit game (15R big hit game), a V passage notification effect for notifying that there is a V passage is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Examples of the V-passage notification effect include displaying a character image of "V" on the display screen 7a and outputting a sound effect indicating V-passage. On the other hand, the big hit game being executed is a big hit game other than the 15R big hit game, that is, a big hit game related to the 12R second big hit or the 12R third big hit (12R big hit game), or a 7R fourth big hit or a 7R fifth big hit. In the case of the big hit game (7R big hit game) or the big hit game of 2R seventh big hit or 2R eighth big hit (2R big hit game), the aforementioned V passage notification effect is not executed. As described above, after the 12R jackpot game is over and after the 2R jackpot game is over, the "probability non-notification state" is set, and therefore, even if there is V passage, it is not notified. Further, in the case of the 7R big hit game, since an effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is performed in the “VS chance effect” described later, even if there is V passage, at this point (when the V passage designation command is received). It will not be notified. However, in order to ensure fairness of the game, the V passage notification effect may be performed also in the case of 12R big hit, 7R big hit and 2R big hit. In this case, it is preferable that the V passage notification effect is performed in a mode that is difficult to recognize as compared with the normally performed effect, in order not to impair the playability in the probability non-informing state and the effect effect by the VS chance effect. Specifically, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like indicating the occurrence of V passage is displayed in a small size at the corner of the display screen 7a, or included in an LED display device (for example, the effect display device 102 or the like) different from the image display device 7. Illuminating or blinking the LED can be exemplified.

Subsequently, in S4414, it is determined whether or not the round start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4414), and when it is determined that the round start command is not received (NO in S4414), the process proceeds to S4421. When it is determined that the round start command is received (YES in S4414), the round designation command corresponding to the received round start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4415), and the process of S4416 is performed. Transition. The round start command transmitted from the main control board 80 includes information capable of specifying the round to be started (start round), and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the information. The number of rounds of the starting round is specified based on the round start command, and a round designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer. When the round designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 produces a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds specified based on the round designation command on the image display device 7. It is executed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, in S4416, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds specified based on the round start command received in S4114, that is, the number of rounds of the start round is 3R (S4416), and if it is not 3R (NO in S4416), When the process proceeds to S4421 and is 3R (YES in S4416), it is determined whether or not the V passage flag is ON (S4417). When it is determined that the V passage flag is ON (YES in S4417), the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the second round during the big hit game, that is, the V round (also referred to as a specific round or a specific ball entering game). (V pass), a V pass effect designation command for instructing execution of effect display corresponding to the pass is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4418), and the V pass flag is set. Is turned off (S4419), and the process proceeds to S4421. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V passage flag is not ON (OFF) in S4417 (NO in S4417), it means that the game ball has not passed the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, the V non-passage effect designation command for instructing execution of the effect display corresponding to the non-passage is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4420), and the process proceeds to S4421. When the V passage effect designation command or the V non-passage effect designation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the CPU of the current big hit game to perform a predetermined time after the third round. First, the effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, when the big hit game being executed is the 7R big hit game, an effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is performed in a "VS chance effect" described later. Further, in the case of the 15R big hit game, a round effect corresponding to V passage or a round effect corresponding to V non-passage is performed as the third round or later round effect. Incidentally, in the case of the 15R big hit game, since the V notification effect has already been executed at the timing when the V passage flag is turned ON as described above, the effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is not particularly performed after the third round. Good. Further, in the case of the 12R big hit game and in the case of the 2R big hit game, as described above, since the "probability non-notification state" is set after the big hit game, at least before the big hit game is finished and the big hit game is In the predetermined period after the end, in principle, the effect corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Finally, in S4421, other processing is performed, and this processing ends. As other processing performed in S4421, processing based on a received command other than the above-mentioned command (for example, a normal symbol variation start command or a normal symbol variation stop command) is performed.

[Variation effect start processing]
Next, the fluctuation effect start processing (S4402) performed based on the reception of the fluctuation start command in the received command analysis processing (S4301) will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the fluctuating effect start process (S4402), first, in S4501, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the fluctuating effect determining random number, the preliminary effect determining random number, the effect symbol determining random number, the specific effect determining random number, etc. Random effect determination random number processing (S4501) for acquiring the various effect determination random numbers is performed. In the first embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value, the mode of the effect symbol game effect to be executed, the notice effect, the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command is analyzed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information that designates a variation pattern) that designates the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, in the information designating the variation pattern, the variation pattern information (P1 to P22) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information designating the current game state, the first special symbol winning/non-judging determination or the second special symbol winning/non-judging determination. The determination result, the symbol information for designating the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since the variation pattern designation command includes one corresponding to the first special symbol and one corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect design game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E.

Here, the effect mode is a mode of effect in the image display device 7. When the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. Specifically, the images displayed on the image display device 7 are different, such as the characters, items, and background images that appear, and the effect symbol game effect can also be executed in a mode according to the effect mode. Further, when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects may be executed depending on the effect mode. In the first embodiment, the effect mode A (mode status “1”) is executed when the low accurate low base state is controlled, and the effect mode B (mode status “2”) is the low accurate high base state (time saving). It is executed when it is controlled to the gaming state), and the effect mode C (mode status "3") is executed when it is controlled to the highly accurate high base state (probability variation gaming state). Therefore, the player can grasp the current game state by confirming which of the production modes is A to C.

In addition, the production mode D (mode status “4”) or the production mode E (mode status “5”) is a big hit game related to the 12R second big hit, the 12R third big hit, the 2R seventh big hit, and the 2R eighth big hit. It is executed in the "probability non-reporting state" when the vehicle is controlled to the low accurate high base state or the high accurate high base state after being broken. Therefore, when the effect mode is D or E, even if the player confirms the effect mode, the probability state of the special symbol hit/miss determination grasps whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state (normal state). Is difficult to do. In that sense, the effect modes D and E can be said to be probability non-notification modes.

Next, in S4504, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. is set (S4504). .. Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referenced in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), the variation production pattern determination table is the big hit time corresponding to the current production mode. The variation effect pattern determination table is set. In the first embodiment, since a plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect modes (mode statuses) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance, in S4504, from among these fluctuation effect pattern determination tables, , A table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables are stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Has been done. In S4504, any one of the plurality of fluctuation effect pattern determination tables is set.

Subsequently, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variable effect pattern that matches the specified fluctuation pattern, and set it (S4505). .. As the variation effect pattern, the variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect symbol game effect) and when the character effect performed using a specific character is performed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character The case where no effect is executed (reach non-effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, with the reach effect, for example, as the display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, all the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). When the form (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stop-displayed (temporarily stopped) with the symbols constituting the big hit mode, and the remaining one Refers to an effect that indicates whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol that completes the big hit mode in a state where the variable display continues. In S4505, based on the effect symbol determination random number acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect symbol") is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 which is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is an odd-numbered symbol such as "777" when the result of the special symbol hit determination is 15R big hit, and "666" when 12R big hit. It is considered to be an even pattern of doublet. In addition, when the reach is out, one of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "787" is different from other effect patterns, and when the reach is out, "635" or the like. Of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, at least one effect symbol is selected such that the other effect symbols are different from each other. In addition, in the first embodiment, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are also stopped and displayed in the same manner (separated pattern) as when they are out of the way, even in the case of the 2R big hit and the 7R big hit. However, for the 2R jackpot and the 7R jackpot, a predetermined chance such as "135" or a dedicated symbol such as "3*3" may be stopped and displayed. The above-described stop display mode of the effect design 8 is an example, and when the big hit occurs, what is stop-displayed as the stop effect design can be appropriately changed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, reach A, reach B, reach C, super reach (also referred to as “SP reach”) A, super reach B, as a variation mode (variation production pattern) of the effect design 8. Super reach C, character effect, etc. are set, and in S4505, which of these effects is performed or these effects are not performed based on the variation effect pattern determination table (this is also referred to as "normal variation"). It is decided. When the reachable effect symbol game effect is executed, one of the reach effects is set based on the variation pattern designation command and the variation effect pattern determination table. Here, as the effect symbol game effect, when the super reach effect is executed, compared to when the normal reach effect is executed, it is set so that there is a high possibility of a big hit. That is, it can be said that the super reach effect is a game effect having a higher jackpot reliability (a possibility of a big hit) than the reach (normal reach) effect. The reach effect can be set (executed) mainly when a variation pattern designating command designating a variation pattern (see FIG. 9) having a variation time of 30,000 ms or more is received. In addition, in the first embodiment, as a kind of super reach (SP reach), a confrontation reach effect in which an ally character (hereinafter referred to as “ally character”) and an enemy character (hereinafter referred to as “enemy character”) decide whether to win or lose ( (3rd effect) is provided, and when the teammate character wins the confrontation reach effect, a big hit confirmation is given. There are four types of production patterns for the showdown reach production, the showdown reaches A to D, and the enemy characters (opponents) are different for each showdown reach. Such a confrontation reach effect can be set (executed) when a fluctuation pattern designating command designating a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms or more (see FIG. 9) is received.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern specified based on the variation pattern information included in the received variation start command (variation pattern designation command) is one of the jackpot variation patterns P1 to P3. If the jackpot type specified based on the symbol information included in the command is 7R jackpot (7R 4th jackpot, 7R 5th jackpot), from the predetermined time during the execution of the effect symbol game effect (fluctuation effect) "VS chance "Directing" is to be started. This "VS chance effect" is performed until the 7R big hit game is completed, and is a variable game effect as well as a special game effect. Details of the “VS chance presentation” will be described later.

In S4505, a variation effect pattern corresponding to any of various variation effects including these "reach effect", "VS chance effect", etc. is set in response to the results of the processing in S4501 to S4504 (S4505). Then, in subsequent S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4506), and the variation effect is generated. The start process ends. When the variation effect start command set in S4506 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100, the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variation effect and the like based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Specific production start processing]
Next, the specific effect start process (S4302) performed in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described. The specific effect means the above-mentioned “VS chance effect”. As shown in FIG. 46, in the specific effect start process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect (effect symbol game effect) is being executed (S4601), and if not being executed (NO in S4601). , If the processing is finished as it is and is being executed (YES in S4601), the processing shifts to the processing of S4602, and the variation effect being executed is the variation effect related to "7R big hit (7R fourth big hit, 7R fifth big hit)" It is determined whether or not (S4602). If the variation effect being executed is not the variation effect related to the "7R jackpot" (NO in S4602), that is, one of the "off", "15R jackpot", "12R jackpot" and "2R jackpot" In the case of such a variation effect (NO in S4602), the processing ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect being executed is the variation effect related to the “7R big hit” (YES in S4602), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (S4603). In the first embodiment, the start timing of the specific effect (VS chance effect) is the timing at which the remaining execution time of the variable effect related to the “7R big hit” (remaining variable time of the special symbol) is 3 seconds. The remaining execution time of the fluctuating effect is, for example, by starting the operation upon the setting of the fluctuating effect start command in S4506 described above, the fluctuating effect is substantially synchronized with the measurement of the fluctuating time of the special symbol on the main control board 80 side. Can be specified by a timer (time measuring means configured by a program of the effect control microcomputer 91) capable of measuring the execution time.

If it is determined in S4603 that it is not the time to start the specific effect (VS chance effect) (NO in S4603), if the processing is ended and it is determined to be the timing to start (YES in S4603), the specific effect (VS chance) An effect pattern (specific effect pattern) of (effect) is selected from a plurality of predetermined effect patterns, and the selected specific effect pattern is set (S4604). In S4604, random number lottery based on the specific effect determination random number is performed to select one of the plurality of specific effect patterns. The random number lottery here is performed using the specific effect determination random number included in the effect determination random number acquired in S4501. Then, a specific effect start command for starting the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the effect pattern set in S4604 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the specific effect start process ends. To do. When the specific effect start command set in S4605 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 causes the effect pattern of the specific effect specified based on the specific effect start command. That is, the predetermined image data corresponding to the specific effect pattern set in S4605 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the "VS chance effect" based on the read image data is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Execute.

Here, as described above, the "VS chance effect" as the specific effect is started at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds of the variable effect related to the 7R jackpot, and then is performed until the 7R jackpot game ends. There is. Further, a plurality of specific effect patterns to be selected in the process of S4604 are stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, and specifically, four types of specific effect patterns are stored. As the effect pattern (specific effect pattern) of the “VS chance effect” of the first embodiment, the same confrontation scenes (confrontation images) as the four confrontation reaches (confrontation reach A to D) in the above-mentioned confrontation reach effect are displayed. It has four specific effect patterns (confrontation A to confrontation D), and in S4604, one of these four specific effect patterns is selected and set, and a confrontation scene based on the set specific effect pattern. (One of the confrontation A to the confrontation D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the execution of the 7R big hit game. It should be noted that the ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 prestores image data corresponding to four confrontation reach in the confrontation reach effect, and the image data is used when executing the confrontation reach effect. However, since the same confrontation scene (confrontation image) is displayed even in the VS chance effect, the image data is used also when the VS chance effect is executed. In this way, by diverting the image data used in the reach effect (variable effect) to the VS chance effect (variable effect and special game effect), the amount of data stored in the image ROM can be reduced. Also, by performing the same confrontation scene effect (second effect) as the confrontation reach effect (third effect) as a variable effect as a special game effect (round effect) during the 7R big hit game, the 7R big hit game is being performed. Despite this, it is possible to give the player an impression as to whether or not the variation effect (confrontation reach effect) is being performed.

When the opening command, ending command, round start command, etc. are received in the received command analysis process (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) after the specific effect (VS chance effect) is started by the process of S4302 (S4408, S4410). , S4414), and the process related to the execution of the effect display based on the reception of these commands is performed as the process related to the execution (progress) of the specific effect (VS chance effect) based on the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604. Further, when the V passage effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passage effect designation command (S4420) is transmitted to the image control board 100 after the start of the specific effect (VS chance effect), the CPU of the image control board 100, A process of displaying the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) in the particular effect (VS chance effect) being executed in correspondence with V passing or V non-passing is performed. That is, the specific effect pattern set in the process of S4604 includes information (competition type information) indicating which of the confrontation A to the confrontation D corresponds, but does not include information indicating the confrontation result (win or lose). There is nothing. In the first embodiment, the image data for displaying “the end of the confrontation scene corresponding to V passage” and “the end of the confrontation scene corresponding to V non-passage” for each of the confrontations A to D. It is stored in advance in the ROM (image ROM) of the control board 100. Therefore, when displaying the ending of the confrontation scene, the CPU of the image control board 100 converts the image data for ending display corresponding to the confrontation scene being executed into the received V passage production designation command or V non-passage production designation command. By reading out based on the image data and performing the effect display using the image data, the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) is displayed in a mode corresponding to V passage or V non-passage. As for the image data for displaying the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect), the image data used for indicating the end (big hit or miss) of the confrontation reach effect (fluctuation effect) may be diverted.

The above is the main processing of the effect control in the first embodiment, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, among the "V passing big jackpot" and the "V non-passing big jackpot" having the same round number, In the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fifth big hit”, the specific effect (“VS chance effect” in this example) is performed as described above. This "VS chance production" and the second big winning opening 35 up to the first and second rounds of the "7R fourth big hit (V passing big hit)" and "7R fifth big hit (V non-passing big hit)" By cooperation with the characteristic opening pattern (opening/closing operation), it becomes more difficult to distinguish (determine) between "7R fourth big hit" and "7R fifth big hit", and the game state after the big hit game is a high probability state. It is possible to make it difficult to determine (break through) whether or not it becomes. The “VS chance presentation” will be described in detail below.

[VS chance production]
53 and 54 show a series of display modes from the start (occurrence) to the end of the VS chance effect executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Incidentally, the VS chance effect (specific effect) of the first embodiment mainly includes an "introduction effect (introduction scene)" shown in FIGS. 53(b) to (d) and FIGS. 53(e) to (f). 54 (g) to (h1) and (h2) shown in FIG. 54 (g) ~ (h1), "confrontation effect (confrontation scene)" is composed of three effects (effect scene). As described above, the first embodiment has four specific effect patterns, and the content of the “confrontation effect (confrontation scene)” is different in each specific effect pattern (confrontation A to D). Then, as will be described later in detail, the selection effect includes an effect (selection effect 2 described later) indicating which of the confrontations A to D has been selected (selection result). For this reason, four production modes (production patterns) are provided for at least the "selection production" and the "confrontation production".

First, FIG. 53(a) shows that the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "5", "6", and "5" in the reach-off state of the display screen 7a in the progress process of the production symbol game production (variable production). It shows a state in which a temporary stop is displayed in the approximate center. With the temporary stop display, the variable display of the special symbol is not yet finished, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed, that is, the result of the special symbol validity determination is not yet deterministically displayed (confirmed display). Means that. Therefore, in the temporary stop display, the individual effect symbols 8 are shown in a state of slightly moving on the display screen 7a to the extent that the type (number etc.) of the effect symbols being displayed can be recognized (shaking). Also called fluctuation). When a girl character image appears in this state as shown in FIG. 53(b), three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (effect symbol display area 7b) are displayed in a small size at the upper left of the display screen 7a. (Reduced display), the variable display is resumed at that position with a small size (introduction effect 1). The "girl character appearance" and the "reduction display of the effect symbol 8" by the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53(b) are performed based on the determination that it is the start timing of the specific effect in S4603 described above. In the first embodiment, the timing when the remaining time until the end of the symbol variation (remaining variation time of the special symbol) becomes about 3 seconds is the start timing of the specific effect.

Then, when about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the display of the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53(b), the characters “VS chance” are displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53(c), and the VS chance effect is displayed. The occurrence (start) of is notified to the player (introduction effect 2). At this time, the sub control board 90 receives the variation stop command from the main control board 80 (S4406), and the image control board 100 receives the variation effect end command transmitted by the sub control board 90 based on this. As a result, when the introduction effect 2 is executed, the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed in a small size at the upper left of the display screen 7a are in the same mode as that of the case of deviation (variation: here. A stop display (confirmed display) is displayed at "325"). Here, the finalized display of the effect design 8 shown in FIG. 53(c) is performed in an extremely short time, and when the finalized display time elapses, the effect design 8 is erased from the display screen 7a (non-operation). The display mode of the display screen 7a shifts to the mode (introduction effect 3) shown in FIG. 53D. Therefore, the symbol finalization effect (fourth effect) related to the stop display (confirmation display) of the effect symbol 8 performed when the introduction effect 2 (FIG. 53(c)) is executed is performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize. It will be. In the first embodiment, the fixed display time of the effect design 8 in the introduction effect 2 is 500 ms (0.5 seconds). In addition, the effect display relating to the “introduction effect (first effect)” shown in FIGS. 53B to 53D, that is, an effect that mainly displays the character image of the girl from the introduction effect 1 to the introduction effect 3 (first effect). ) Is an effect displayed both during execution of the variation effect shown in FIG. 53(b) (during pattern change) and during execution of the big hit game shown in FIG. 53(d). In other words, it is both a variation production and a special game production.

And the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the introduction effect 2 of FIG. 53(c) is performed is a state in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a 7R big hit symbol, and at this time, the 7R big hit from the main control board 80. The sub-control board 90 receives the opening command related to (S4408), and the image control board 100 receives the special game start command from the sub-control board 90 based on this. As a result, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the introduction effect 3 of FIG. 53D is executed. Here, the 7R big hit opening period (1900 ms) is shorter than the other big hit opening periods (8000 ms), and in the 7R big hit opening period, a so-called opening showing big hit occurrence, big hit game start, etc. The effect image (girl's character image) displayed in the introduction effect 2 is continuously displayed in the introduction effect 3 without performing the effect. That is, the background images of the introduction effects 2 and 3 are the same. In this way, "the opening period is short and the background image is not changed without performing the opening effect", and the above-mentioned "short-time fixed display of the effect design 8 (fixed display of the scattered in this example) and the effect design 8" It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the timing at which the first opening of the second special winning opening 35 (V attacker) is started (the start timing of the big hit game).

As shown in FIG. 53(d), in the introduction effect 3, a message urging the player to enter a game ball into the second special winning opening 35 (V attacker) (the character "Aim the attacker") and the player On the other hand, a launch navigation image 8n that indicates the launch position of the player is displayed. After this, until the third round of the 7R jackpot game is started, that is, until the second round of the 7R jackpot game is finished and the interval period (2 seconds) is finished, the display mode of the display screen 7a is as shown in FIG. The introduction effect 3 of 53(d) is changed to the selection effects 1 and 2 of FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f). In the selection effect 1 of FIG. 53(e), there is an effect (hereinafter also referred to as “roulette effect”) for selecting in a roulette format which of the “confrontations A to D” will be performed in the VS chance effect this time. In the selected effect 2 shown in FIG. 53(f), the result of the roulette effect is displayed together with the enemy character image 8b. This selection result corresponds to the specific effect pattern selected and set in S4604 in the above-described specific effect start process (S4302). The change from the selected effect 1 to the selected effect 2 is about 60000 ms (6 seconds) after the start of the second V attacker opening (16000 ms opening shown in FIG. 49) after the start of the 7R big hit game. Done. Then, the selection effect 2 (display of the result of the roulette effect) is performed until the third round of the 7R big hit game is started. With such a selection effect, it is possible to increase the player's interest level in the confrontation scene (confrontation effect) that is started thereafter, and enhance the effect of the VS chance effect to improve the amusement of the game during the big hit game. It is possible to plan. In addition, after the selection effect 1 of FIG. 53(e), since the big hit game is in progress, the launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters "right hit" and "right direction" are shown) instructing the player to right hit. The symbol) is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the confrontation A to D (confrontation effect pattern) to be selected in the roulette effect is an effect in which a confrontation scene is configured in the same manner as the confrontation reach A to D in the above-described confrontation reach effect.

Here, until the third round of the 7R big hit game is started, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shows "7R fourth big hit" and "7R fifth big hit" both in FIG. ) To (f), a series of effects (first effect), that is, introduction effects 1 to 3 and selection effects 1 and 2 are performed, and 1 round and 2 rounds (V round) of "7R fourth big hit", The effect display mode is the same as in the first round of "7R fifth big hit". In addition, as shown in FIG. 49, in the 1st round and 2nd round (V round) of "7R 4th big hit" and the 1st round of "7R 5th big hit", the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) The mode of the opening/closing operation is similar. For this reason, for the player, at least either the "7R fourth big hit" or the "7R fifth big hit" occurs from the end of the fluctuation production related to the 7R big hit until the third round of the 7R big hit game is started. It is extremely difficult to recognize (determine) whether or not it is done. As a result, at least from the start of the 7R jackpot game (the first V attacker opening shown in FIG. 49, introduction effect 3 in FIG. 53D) to the end of the round game after the second V attacker opening ( Until the start of the interval after the second V-attacker release shown in FIG. 49, up to the selection effect 2 in FIG. 53(f), that is, 1 round and 2 rounds (V round) of “7R fourth big hit”, and “ One round of "7R fifth big hit" makes it possible for the player to recognize the game ball as one "chance round" in which the V attacker enters the game ball and aims to pass the game ball to the specific area 39. .. In this sense, through one chance round (1 round + 2 rounds), it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the high-probability state based on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 39. It is also possible to consider it as a "decision game".

And after the 7R big hit game starts, when the V attacker opens the second time (16000 ms open), in the case of "7R 4th big hit", the first open of the previous time is done as one round. , When the V attacker opens for the second time, it means that he has advanced to 2 rounds (V rounds). Since the movable piece 150 in the V attacker is in the operating state (specific area open) during this opening, when the V attacker is opened for the second time and thereafter in the “7R fourth big hit” (second to seventh times shown in the upper stage of FIG. 49). When the game ball is inserted into the V attacker (at the time of opening), at least one of the entered game balls will pass through the specific area 39 with high probability (see FIG. 47(b)). On the other hand, in the case of "7R fifth big hit", as in the case of "7R fourth big hit", the first opening of the previous time has ended, but it is still in one round (it has not progressed to the second round) For this reason, when the V attacker is opened for the second time or later in the round (when the second to seventh times shown in the lower part of FIG. 49 is opened), the movable piece 150 is not in an operating state (closed to a specific area), and a game is played at this opening Even if the ball is entered into the V attacker, the entered game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 (see FIG. 47(a)). As described above, in the first embodiment, the degree of difficulty (difficulty) in determining the 7R jackpot type is increased from both aspects of the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker (the second special winning opening 35) and the effect display mode. In particular, in order to perform the second V attacker opening of "7R 4th big hit" as 2 rounds (V round) with the same progress as the 2nd V attacker opening of "7R 5th big hit", "7R 4th big hit" By ending the V attacker opening of the first round with a short time opening (opening of 100 ms), the apparent sameness is secured with the first V attacker opening of the "7R fifth big hit" (Fig. 49). See). This makes it possible for the player to recognize a “chance round” having a different V-passing possibility as one “chance round” in which it is difficult to detect the difference. From this, the first round in which the first V attacker opening (opening of 100 ms) of the "7R fourth big hit" is performed is, so to speak, a dummy round (pseudo round, non-specific round, non-specific ball entry game). Can be said.

Then, in the 7R 4th jackpot, when the interval period that reaches the first time after the second opening of the V attacker ends, the round 3 advances, and in the 7R 5th jackpot, the first interval period that reaches after the 2nd opening of the V attacker. Ends, the process proceeds to the second round (V round), the V attacker is released for a short time (100 ms) in the relevant round, and then proceeds to the third round (see FIG. 49). With the start of the third round, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed from the selection effect 2 of FIG. 53(f) based on the content of the competition (confrontation effect pattern) shown in the selection effect 2. The display changes to the confrontation effect of FIG. 54(g) for displaying the scene, and the ally character image 8a is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this way, when the "chance round" is finished and the third round is started, the display mode of the display screen 7a is significantly changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the V attacker short opening (instantaneous opening and closing) before the start of the third round in the “7R fifth jackpot”, that is, the presence of the V attacker short opening in the second round. .. In addition, since the V attacker opening time in 2 rounds (V rounds) of the 7R 5th jackpot is 100 ms (0.1 seconds), it is extremely unlikely that a game ball will enter the V attacker. The possibility of passing through the specific area 39 is extremely low.

When the confrontation effect of FIG. 54(g) is displayed along with the start of the third round, the sub control board 90 receives the round start command of the third round from the main control board 80 (S4414, S4415), and based on this. The image control board 100 receives the V passage effect designation command (S4418) or the V non-passage effect designation command (S4420) from the sub control board 90. Then, after the third round, a confrontation scene (confrontation effect) between the ally character image 8a and the enemy character image 8b is developed on the display screen 7a as the round progresses, and the confrontation is reached by the end of the seventh round of the 7R jackpot game. The ending of is displayed. The end of the confrontation scene differs depending on whether the image control board 100 receives the V passage effect designating command or the V non-passing effect designating command, and the result of the previous chance round depends on the end of the confrontation scene. Will be shown. That is, if the V passage effect designation command is received, the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and it is determined that the high probability state will be reached after the jackpot game, so the display screen 7a. The display mode of is the teammate character winning effect shown in FIG. 54(h1). On the other hand, if the V non-passage effect designation command is received, the game ball has not passed the specific area 39 in the previous chance round, and the high probability state may not be reached after the jackpot game ends (becomes a normal state). Since it is determined, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the teammate character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54(h2). From this, it can be said that the effect (confrontation effect) relating to the confrontation scenes shown in FIGS. 54(g), (h1), and (h2) is a “result notification effect” indicating the result of the previous chance round. It should be noted that the “result notification effect” can be grasped as a “whole confrontation effect” in a broad sense, and can be understood as a “ally character victory effect” and a “ally character defeat effect” in a narrow sense. When the teammate character winning effect of FIG. 54(h1) is executed, the 7R jackpot this time is highly likely to be the “7R fourth jackpot”, and the teammate character defeating effect of FIG. 54(h2) is executed. In this case, the 7R big hit this time is highly likely to be the “7R fifth big hit”.

Incidentally, the confrontation effect (second effect) performed from (g) to (h1) or (h2) of FIG. 54, that is, from the third round to the seventh round of the 7R big hit game (across multiple round games) The shown confrontation effect (second effect) shows the same confrontation scene as the confrontation reach effect (one mode of SP reach) performed as a variable effect. Then, for each of the confrontation effects (second effects) of the confrontations A to D, a teammate character victory effect which is a V passing mode and a teammate character defeating effect which is a V non-passing mode are respectively provided, and specifically, , As a production aspect that is developed from the start to the end (end display) of the confrontation production (confrontation scene), a production aspect that leads to the victory of an ally character and a production aspect that leads to the defeat of the V ally character are provided for each competition production. There is. Further, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is an effect design considering the advance of a round game (round digestion) based on a specified number of game balls entering the V attacker and a specified opening time of the V attacker. Therefore, in the introduction effects 1 to 3 and the selection effects 1 and 2 (see FIGS. 53B to 53F) performed by the time the third round is started, the game balls are appropriately fired. As long as there is a game ball to the V attacker until the start of the third round (round progress status), it progresses, and even if it takes time to complete the round even if the launch is delayed, etc. It progresses according to the round digestion. Similarly, the confrontation effect (see FIGS. 54(g), (h1), and (h2)) performed from the third round to the seventh round is the seventh round as long as the game balls are appropriately fired. The game progresses according to the status of the game ball entering the V attacker until the end (round progress status). Even if it takes time to complete the round due to delay in launch, etc., it progresses according to the round completion. I will do it. Then, the confrontation effect (VS chance effect) ends at the end of the seventh round.

When 7 rounds of the 7R jackpot game are completed, the sub-control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), and the special game end command from the sub-control board 90 based on this is sent to the image control board 100. To receive. As a result, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the teammate character winning effect shown in FIG. 54(h1) to the ending player effect shown in FIG. 54(i1) or from the teammate character defeating effect shown in FIG. 54(h2). The variation effect shown in 54 (i2) is obtained. When the game ball is passing through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big hit game this time, an ending image (characters of “probability variation mode entry” here) relating to the ending effect shown in FIG. 54(i1) is displayed. To be done. In the first embodiment, although not shown, in the same display mode as in FIG. 54(i1), the ending image is a character display of "time saving mode entry" instead of "probability variation mode entry". .. This is the ending image displayed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the V round of the 7R fourth big hit game. However, since the 7R fourth big hit is a "special area passing big hit", it is unlikely that this "time saving mode entry" image will be displayed if a game is played normally. Also, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round and does not pass, the screen of the variable effect shown in FIG. 54(i2) (effect symbols 8L, 8C) , 8R display). The ending image shown in FIG. 54(i2) is an effect of "indicating a transition to the normal mode".

Here, in the first embodiment, as described above, the ending time specified based on the ending command from the main control board 80 is different between the 7R fourth big hit and the 7R fifth big hit. Specifically, when the game ball passes the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth big hit in the low accurate low base state, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a changes from the mode of FIG. 54(h1) to that of FIG. 54(i1). When changing to the mode, the ending time becomes 17,000 ms (17 seconds). Further, in the low accurate low base state, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth big hit, that is, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the time saving mode entry image not shown from the mode of FIG. 54(h2). When changing to the mode, the ending time becomes 8000 ms (8 seconds). Also, in the case of the 7R fifth big hit in the low accurate low base state, the display mode of the display screen 7a is the mode of FIG. 54(h2) to the mode of FIG. 54(i2) regardless of whether or not the specific region 39 has passed. And the ending time becomes 5000 ms (5 seconds). The difference in the ending time is set in this way, when the gaming state after the jackpot game is over becomes a "probability variation gaming state (high-precision high-base state)" that is advantageous to the player, the ending time is lengthened. It is effective to positively show the transition to the "probability variation game state (high-probability high base state)" by the ending production, and the game state after the big hit game is "low probability state and non-time saving state (low This is because, in the case of "probably low base state"", it is not necessary to spend time to intentionally inform that the player is in a normal gaming state with no particular advantage.

In the first embodiment, when the 7R fifth big hit is reached, even if the sub control board 90 receives the ending command from the main control board 80 (S4410), the effect (ending effect) is particularly performed. Without doing so, the display mode of the display screen 7a becomes the mode shown in FIG. 54(i2) in a short time (5000 ms in this example) after the 7R jackpot game is over. The display mode shown in FIG. 54(i2) is a display mode when performing a normal variation effect, that is, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are largely displayed in the approximate center of the screen to produce an effect symbol variation game effect. It is a display mode when performing. In the case of the 7R fifth big hit, the game state after the big hit game ends is a low base state, so when returning the display form of the display screen 7a to the display form at the time of performing a normal variation effect As shown in FIG. 54(i2), a launch navigation image 8n (here, the characters “left hit” and the symbol indicating “left direction”) instructing the player to left hit is displayed near the center of the screen.

The above is the basic flow of VS chance production executed in the case of a 7R big hit. Although the possibility is low, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fourth big hit, the game state after the big hit game is "low probability state and time saving state (low accurate high base state)". Become. In this case, in the VS chance effect, the teammate character defeat effect shown in FIG. 54(h2) is displayed as the end of the confrontation scene (confrontation effect). The ending time specified based on the ending command transmitted from the main control board 80 at the end of the big hit game is 8000 ms (8 seconds). In addition, although the possibility is low, when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the 7R fifth big hit, the game state after the big hit game is “high probability state and non-time saving state (high accuracy low base state)”. ..

As described above, by performing a series of "VS chance production (specific production)" from the end of the variation display of the special symbol relating to the 7R jackpot to the end of the 7R jackpot game, the player can start the jackpot game or V. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the round, it becomes difficult to determine (detect) whether or not the game ball can pass through the specific area 39, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the gaming machine equipped with the V round. It is possible to plan. That is, the introduction effect is started on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the middle of the variation display of the special symbol related to the 7R big hit, and after the introduction effect is started, the variation display of the special symbol is ended (stop display) to the 7R. While the game situation changes to the start of the big hit game and the start of the V round, the introduction effect does not end at the timing of the situation change and the background image related to the introduction effect does not change. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the start of the big hit game or the start of the V round, and in turn, it becomes difficult to determine (detect) whether or not the game ball can pass to the specific area 39 in the V round.

Further, in the VS chance effect, the confrontation effect that is performed through the selection effect after the introduction effect is in the same mode as the confrontation reach effect that is performed during the variable display of the special symbol, so that it is started during the variable symbol display of the special symbol. A special game, an introduction effect that is continuously performed during the big hit game (7R big hit game in the first embodiment), a selection effect that is continuously performed after the introduction effect, and a confrontation effect that is continuously performed after the selection effect. Although it is in the middle, it is possible to express as a "series of effects" (developing effect as a variable effect) related to the variable display of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the start of the big hit game and the start of the V round, and further, it is possible to more determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 in the V round, the presence/absence of passage, and the like. It can be difficult.

Further, the mode of the confrontation effect in the VS chance effect is the same as the confrontation reach effect as the variable effect, and the number of the effect modes is also the same (four types in the first embodiment). Moreover, the image data used in the showdown reach production is diverted to the showdown production in the 7R big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the confrontation effect during the 7R big hit game without increasing the image data (data amount). In addition to this, for each of the plurality of confrontation effects that can be executed in the VS chance effect, an effect mode indicating an ending corresponding to V passage and an effect mode corresponding to V non-passage are provided. It is possible to increase the variation of production. From these things, it is possible to enhance the effect effect by the VS chance effect that is performed at the time of 7R big hit, and to bring the player's consciousness to the effect developed on the display screen 7a as much as possible. It is possible to make it more difficult to determine the possibility of passing a game ball to the specific area 39 in the round, the presence/absence of the passage, and the like.

Also, after starting the VS chance effect, when performing the symbol finalization effect based on the stop display of the special symbol, that is, during the execution of the introduction effect started at the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to the 7R big hit. Since the final effect is performed in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to recognize it, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the special symbol is stopped and the 7R big hit game is started, and this is accompanied. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the start timing of the V round. Furthermore, since a "VS chance production" composed of three productions (production scenes) of "introduction production (introduction scene)", "selection production (selection scene)" and "confrontation production (confrontation scene)" is performed, 7R In combination with the difficulty in recognizing the symbol finalization effect related to the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression that the big hit has occurred. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively improve the game interest of the 7R big hit game including the chance round. Further, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the 7R fifth big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game ends is a low-probability low base state, but "VS chance effect" and "symbol confirmation effect recognition" Because of the difficulty, it is possible to reduce the impression that a big hit has occurred, and it is also possible to reduce the disappointment that the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state after a chance round.

In addition, by configuring the VS chance effect starting from the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (the final stage), a round game (for example, the second round) that is performed relatively early in the plurality of round games that constitute the big hit game. ) Is set as V round, and the remaining round game (for example, the third round and thereafter) can be positioned as a round for notifying the result of V round. Then, in the period from the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (late stage) to the end of V round, the production time for performing the production of notifying the start or execution (occurrence) of V round (chance round) is secured, During the period from the end of the V round to the end of the remaining round game, it is possible to secure the effect time for performing the result notification effect and the like. As a result, after performing V round early, it is possible to spend the period for the V round result notification effect until the remaining round game is completed. In this case, the longer the period until the remaining round game is finished, the more the effect time of the result notification effect can be obtained. Therefore, after the big hit game is started, the V round is performed at the earliest possible timing and the remaining time. It is desirable to make the execution period of the round game as long as possible.

Further, in the 7R jackpot game accompanied by VS chance effect, in the round game after the third round (3rd round to 7th round), a confrontation effect indicating whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area 39 in the previous V round. Is performed, and the production mode of the showdown production itself is a mode corresponding to the result of the previous V round. Further, the image control board 100 receives the V passage effect designating command (S4418) or the V non-passing effect designating command (S4420) from the sub control board 90, and the confrontation effect is performed based on the received command. There is also no problem that the contents of No. and the result of the previous V round become inconsistent. From these things, in the remaining round games after the end of the V round, it becomes possible to perform a highly entertaining effect that is consistent with the result of the previous V round, and the effect performed in the remaining round games (the book In the example, it is possible to enhance the effect of the show production).

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in the special electric accessory processing of FIG. 32, the special winning opening closing processing (S2115) is executed at the end of each round constituting the big hit game. The next round is not started until the special winning opening closing process for each round is completed (completed). Specifically, it is based on the processing of S2115 and S2116 of FIG. According to the processing of the first embodiment as described above, processing relating to each round (special winning opening closing processing), for example, interval period setting processing, winning/discharging number coincidence determination processing, retry operation processing, and error notification processing are performed. After confirming the completion, the next round is started, so that each round can be appropriately and surely executed. Also, if there is a defect in a given round, it will be possible to start the next round in a state where the defect has been resolved by taking measures such as resolution processing of the defect without moving to the next round. ..

By controlling in this way, there is an advantage that each round can be properly ended and the next round can be started appropriately, but the start time of the next round is delayed, and the jackpot game progresses. It has a problem of being late. In order to solve this, in the jackpot game of the second embodiment, a special winning opening that is opened in the previous round (being able to enter the ball) and a big winning opening that is opened in the later round (is in the enterable state) And are different from each other, at least a part of the special winning opening closing process (internal period setting process, entry/exit coincidence determination process, retry operation process, error notification process) related to the previous round is compared with the subsequent round. It is supposed to run in parallel. As a result, the waiting time until the start of the next round, which is set between the rounds, is made as short as possible, and the big hit game can be progressed quickly and smoothly.

Here, of course, "at least a part of the special winning opening closing process related to the previous round is executed in parallel with the subsequent round", and of course, all of these processes (interval period setting process, winning/discharging coincidence determination process) , Retry operation process, error notification process) may be executed in parallel with the subsequent round, or one or more of these processes may be executed in parallel with the subsequent round. The big hit game is composed of a plurality of rounds (round games), and either the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened for each round (the ball can be entered). It is supposed to be. In addition, the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) to be opened in a round is to be opened in a predetermined opening/closing pattern set for each round.

[Special electric accessory processing (big hit game)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 60, the special electric auditors product processing (big hit game) of the second embodiment will be described. The other control processing, the board surface structure, and the like are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Further, since S2151 to S2155 of the special electric auditors product processing (S1108) of the second embodiment are the same as the special electric auditors product processing of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, in S2155, when it is determined that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2155), a first special winning opening closing process described below is performed (S2156), and then a second special winning opening closing process described below is performed (S2157). ), and proceeds to the processing of S2158. Here, as will be described later in detail, the first special winning opening closing process (S2156) is, when a round that opens the first special winning opening 30 is executed in the jackpot game, all opening and closing operations of the round are performed. This is a process (also referred to as “confirmation process”) executed after the end (after the end of the round). Similarly, the second special winning opening closing process (S2157), after executing the round of opening the second special winning opening 35 in the jackpot game, after finishing all opening and closing operations of the round ( This is a process (also referred to as a “confirmation process”) to be executed after the round).

When it is determined in S2158 that it is the round start time (YES in S2158), the process proceeds to S2159. The processes of S2159 to S2163 are the same as the special electric auditors product process of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. If it is determined in S2155 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2155), the process proceeds to S2171. The processing of S2171 to S2175 is also the same as the special electric auditors product processing of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

When it is determined in S2158 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2158), the process proceeds to S2164. Here, when it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round, during the round, or during the special winning opening closing process (the first special winning opening closing process or 2 major winning hole closing process). In S2164, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening/closing operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the predetermined special winning opening opening pattern started in S2160 is being executed (during the round) (S2164). When it is determined in S2164 that the special winning opening/closing operation is being executed (during a round) (YES in S2164), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the running round is satisfied (S2165). If it is determined in S2165 that the round ending condition is not satisfied (NO in S2165), the process ends. The round ending conditions are the same as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2165 that the round end condition is satisfied (YES in S2165), the round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2166), and the process proceeds to S2167. In S2166, a round end command that can specify the round to be ended is set, such as "1R end command" for the end of the first round and "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is transmitted to the sub control unit 90 by the output process of S201.

When it is determined in S2164 that the special winning opening/closing operation is not being executed (in a round) (NO in S2164), the process proceeds to S2170. In S2167, it is determined whether or not the first special winning opening opening round has ended, that is, whether the special winning opening opened in the finished round is the first special winning opening 30 (S2167). When it is determined in S2167 that the special winning opening opened in the finished round is the first special winning opening (YES in S2167), the special winning opening closing process relating to the first special winning opening (that is, the first big winning) In order to execute the mouth closing process (S2156), the first closing process flag is turned on (S2168), and the process proceeds to S2170. On the other hand, in S2167, when it is determined that the special winning opening opened in the finished round is not the first special winning opening, that is, the big winning opening opened in the finished round is the second special winning opening (in S2167) NO), in order to execute the special winning opening closing processing (that is, the second special winning opening closing processing (S2157)) related to the second special winning opening, the second closing processing flag is turned ON (S2169), and the processing of S2170 is performed. Transition. In S2170, a round counter subtraction process described later is performed (S2170), and the process ends.

[First prize winning hole closing process]
Next, the first special winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “first confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, as the special winning opening closing processing, the special winning opening closing processing relating to one of the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening is performed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, it is possible to open the second special winning opening while executing the first special winning opening closing processing, and open the first special winning opening during execution of the second special winning opening closing processing. It is possible to operate. From this, in the special winning opening closing processing of the second embodiment, depending on the situation, the first special winning opening closing processing and the second special winning opening closing processing may be executed in parallel with the control processing. Has become.

In the first special winning opening closing process (S2156), first, in S3001, it is determined whether the first closing process flag is ON (S3001), and when it is determined that the first closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3001), The process ends without performing the special winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the first closing process flag is ON (YES in S3001), then it is determined whether it is the start time of the interval period (S3002). If it is determined in S3002 that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in S3002), (the measurement of) the interval period is started (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3004. If it is determined in S3002 that it is not the start time of the interval period, that is, if the interval period is already being executed (measurement is being performed) (NO in S3002), the process proceeds to S3004.

In S3004, it is determined whether it is the end time of the interval period (S3004), and when it is determined that it is the end time of the interval period (YES in S3004), the first closing process flag is turned off (S3005), and the process is ended. On the other hand, in S3004, when it is determined that it is not the end time of the interval period, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measurement in progress) (NO in S3004), the first winning hole closing process is not completed and remains in the continuous state. The process ends (without completion). Here, the first special winning opening 30 does not include a specific area 39 (specific area detection sensor 39a) or a movable piece 150 that changes the possibility of guiding the game ball to the specific area, and thus the first winning hole ( (Or discharge) is provided only with the first special winning opening sensor 30a. Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging inside the special winning opening is low, and processing such as error notification based on the winning/discharging number matching determination processing, the retry operation, and the winning/discharging number mismatch determination processing is not performed. That is, in the special winning opening closing processing (first special winning opening closing processing) related to the round in which the first special winning opening 30 is opened, the interval period setting processing is performed, and the large win related to the round in which the second special winning opening 35 is opened. The other special winning opening closing processing that can be executed in the winning opening closing processing (second special winning opening closing processing) is not executed. It should be noted that also for the first special winning opening 30, a sensor for detecting a ball entering and a sensor for detecting a discharging may be separately provided.

[2nd prize winning hole closing process]
Next, the second special winning opening closing process (also referred to as “confirmation process” or “second confirmation process”) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. Inside the second special winning opening 35, a second special winning opening sensor that detects a game ball that enters the second special winning opening 35, and a discharge of the game ball that enters the second big winning opening 35 is detected. Guide the non-specific area sensor 49a and the specific area sensor 39a, the game ball entering the second special winning opening 35 to one of the non-specific area (non-specific area sensor 49a) and the specific area (specific area sensor 39a) The movable piece 150 is provided. Therefore, in the round in which the second special winning opening is opened, particularly in the round in which the second special winning opening is opened and the movable piece 150 is operated in a predetermined mode, the possibility of ball clogging increases, In the second special winning opening closing processing related to the round, processing (confirmation processing) different from the first special winning opening closing processing is executed.

Specifically, in the second special winning opening closing process (S2157), first, it is determined whether or not the second closing process flag is ON (S3051), and when it is determined that the second closing process flag is not ON (NO in S3051). The process ends without performing the special winning opening closing process (confirmation process) such as the interval period setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3051 that the second closing process flag is ON (YES in S3051), then it is determined whether it is the start time of the interval period (S3052). When it is determined in S3052 that it is the start time of the interval period (YES in S3052), (the measurement of) the interval period is started (S3053), and the process proceeds to S3054. When it is determined in S3052 that it is not the start time of the interval period (NO in S3052), the process proceeds to S3054. Here, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the interval period, the interval period is already being executed (measuring), the interval period has ended and the retry operation has not yet been executed, or the retry operation has been executed. It is possible to mention the case where it is in the middle, the case after the retry operation is completed and before the error notification is executed, and the case where the error notification is being executed.

In S3054, it is determined whether or not the interval period has ended (S3054), and when it is determined that the interval period has not ended, that is, the interval period is still being executed (measurement in progress) (NO in S3054), the process To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval period has ended (YES in S3054), the process proceeds to S3055. The processes of S3055 to S3059 are the same as the processes of S2705 to S2709 of the special winning opening closing process of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Incoming/outgoing number matching judgment processing]
Next, the input/discharge number matching determination process (S3059) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, the winning/discharging number coincidence determination processing (S3059) is not performed in the first special winning opening closing processing, but is performed only in the second special winning opening closing processing. Therefore, the closing process flag that is turned off in S2854 and S2862 is the second closing process flag. This corresponds to the processes of S2804 and S2812 of the input/discharge number matching determination process (S2708) of the first embodiment. The other processes of the input/discharge number matching determination process (S3059) of the second embodiment are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

[Round counter subtraction processing]
Next, the round counter subtraction processing (S2170) according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This process is a process performed after the round end condition is satisfied, that is, after all opening operations in the round are completed. By this processing, if the first special winning opening closing processing related to the previous round that opens the first special winning opening is completed, it is possible to execute the next round that opens the first special winning opening. .. On the contrary, if the first special winning opening closing process related to the previous round that opens the first special winning opening is not completed, the execution (start) of the next round that opens the first special winning opening is impossible. I am trying. Similarly, if the second special winning opening closing process related to the previous round that opens the second special winning opening is completed, it is possible to execute the next round that opens the second special winning opening. On the contrary, if the second special winning opening closing process related to the previous round that opens the second special winning opening is not completed, the execution (start) of the next round that opens the second special winning opening is impossible. I am trying.

Therefore, for example, the second special winning opening closing process related to the round for opening the second special winning opening (for example, the second round), and the next round for opening the first special winning opening (for example, the third round) The opening operation can be executed in parallel. However, unless the second special winning opening closing process related to the round for opening the second special winning opening (for example, the second round) is completed, the next round for opening the second special winning opening (for example, 4 rounds). It is assumed that it does not move to the eye). Although not set in the execution pattern of the round in the jackpot game of this embodiment, if the next round (for example, the fourth round) is the round in which the first big winning opening is opened, the previous ( The further next round (for example, the fourth round) may be executed (started) on condition that the first special winning opening closing process of the third round) is completed. Of course, it does not matter which big winning opening is opened, and the next round may not be moved. That is, only one round may be executed in parallel with the predetermined special winning opening closing process.

Specifically, in the round counter subtraction processing (S2170), first, it is determined whether or not the next round is a round for opening the first big winning opening (S2901). If it is determined in S2901 that the next round is a round for opening the first big winning opening (YES in S2901), it is then determined whether or not the first closing process flag is OFF (S2902), and the first When it is determined that the closing process flag is not OFF, that is, the first special winning opening closing process is not yet completed (NO in S2902), the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2902), the process proceeds to S2907.

If it is determined in S2901 that the next round is not the round that opens the first big winning opening (NO in S2901), then it is determined whether or not the next round is the round that opens the second big winning opening ( S2903). When it is determined in S2903 that the next round is a round in which the second special winning opening is opened (YES in S2903), it is then determined whether or not the second closing processing flag is OFF (S2904), and in S2904. If it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2904), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2904 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2904), the process proceeds to S2907.

Here, in S2904, when it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF, that is, the second special winning opening closing process is not completed, the round that has ended this time is a round in which the second winning opening is opened. There is a case where the second special winning opening closing process has not been completed yet. That is, this is the case where the rounds for opening the second special winning opening are continuously executed. Next, although the round that has ended this time is a round that opens the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening closing process related to the previous round that opens the second big winning opening has not ended There are cases.

This is because, in the second special winning opening closing process relating to the previous round in which the second special winning opening is opened, the number of incoming balls and the number of discharging are determined to be inconsistent in the process of determining the number of incoming and outgoing numbers, and the retry operation process is performed. It is conceivable that an error notification process may be performed because it is not determined to be coincident even if a retry operation is performed (also referred to as “movable member operation process”). In such a case, the next round (opening operation) of opening the second special winning opening is not executed (started) until the second special winning opening closing process is completed. If the match determination process is not repeated even if the predetermined period match determination process is repeated, the second special winning opening closing process is completed based on the lapse of a predetermined error notification period.

Further, in S2903, if it is determined that the next round is not the round for opening the second big winning opening, that is, the final round in the jackpot game (NO in S2903), then it is determined whether the first closing process flag is OFF. A determination is made (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2905), it is then determined whether the second closing process flag is OFF (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the second closing process flag is OFF (YES in S2906), the process proceeds to S2907. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the first closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2905) and if it is determined that the second closing process flag is not OFF (NO in S2906), the process ends. That is, when all the opening operations of the final round have been completed, it is confirmed that both the first special winning opening closing processing and the second special winning opening closing processing have been completed, and the process proceeds to S2907. Since the processes of S2907 to S2911 are the same as the processes of S2117 to S2121 of the special electric auditors product process of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Timing chart]
Further, FIG. 60 shows a timing chart showing an embodiment of a predetermined round in the jackpot game of the second embodiment. In this timing chart, for the sake of convenience, the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged do not match in the second coin winning hole closing process in the second big winning opening closing process, and the matching determination process is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Even if they do not match, a retry operation is performed and an error is notified. Then, while the second special winning opening closing processing is being executed, in parallel with the second special winning opening closing processing, the first special winning opening which is a special winning opening different from the second round is opened in the third round. 7 illustrates a manner of performing an eye.

As shown in this timing chart, in the second embodiment, the second special winning opening closing process relating to the previous round, that is, the interval period setting process, the retry operation process, the error notification process, and the process between them are set. The waiting period and the opening operation of the next round (third round) can be executed in parallel. In addition, in the second embodiment, in addition to this, the operation of the movable piece 150 of the previous round (second round) (opening/closing operation of a specific area) and the opening operation of the next round (third round) are performed in parallel. And it is feasible.

Further, the opening operation of the previous round and the opening operation of the subsequent round (the opening operation of the first special winning opening and the opening operation of the second special winning opening) are controlled so as not to be executed in duplicate. However, as shown in FIG. 60, depending on the situation, the operation of the movable piece 150 (opening/closing operation of a specific region) is continued even after all the opening operations of the previous round (second round) are completed (FIG. 60). 2000 ms shown in 60). Further, the specific area sensor 39a is also set to the valid period as the extra period during this continuous period and the predetermined period after the continuous period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60). That is, the valid period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) of the second big winning opening in the previous round, and the game ball detection sensor of the first big winning opening (first big winning hole sensor 30a) in the next round. The validity period of and may overlap. Although the specific area sensor 39a is set to the valid period for the continuous period and the predetermined period after the continuous period (900 ms shown in FIG. 60), similarly, the non-specific region sensor 49a also has the valid period. It is said that. Since the second special winning opening sensor 35a does not enter after the completion of all opening operations, the second special winning opening sensor 35a may be set to an invalid period or similarly set to an effective period. The valid period or invalid period is for deciding whether to enable or disable the privilege grant when passing through the specific area. Regarding the game ball detection function (discharge detection function), it is from the start of the round. , At least until the end of the error notification period. As a result, even if a game ball is detected during the invalid period, it is possible to determine that the numbers match in the input/discharge number matching determination process.

In this way, the special winning opening closing process relating to the previous round and the opening action of the next round are executed in parallel, or the action of the movable piece (opening/closing action of a specific area) relating to the previous round, The opening operation of the round is executed in parallel, or the valid period of the game ball detection sensor (specific area sensor 39a) related to the previous round and the opening operation of the next round are executed in parallel. Made it possible. This made it possible to start the next round quickly. If there is a mismatch between the number of balls entered and the number of balls ejected during the special winning opening closing process, etc., the repeat determination process, the retry operation process, and the error notification process are performed in parallel with the next round. As a result, it is possible to execute the big hit game quickly and smoothly without stalling the progress of the round. Further, as in the first embodiment, also in the second embodiment, since the input/output number matching determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle, when the input/output numbers match, an unnecessary operation is not performed. It is possible to complete the special winning opening closing process.

Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment is different from the other embodiments in the processing relating to the execution of the VS chance effect (specific effect). In the following, differences from the content described in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, there are four types of confrontation A to D regarding the confrontation effect (confrontation scene) in the VS chance effect, and which of the confrontations A to D is executed is VS. It was decided when the opportunity production was started. That is, the content (confrontation effect pattern) of the confrontation effect performed during the VS chance effect is determined based on the specific effect pattern selected and set in the process of S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. It was. Then, in accordance with the V passage effect designation command or the V non-passage effect designation command received in S4418 or S4420 of the received command analysis process (S4301) shown in FIG. 44, the end of the confrontation effect (win/loss of teammate character) is displayed. It was a thing. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed is not determined when the VS chance effect is started, but at the second round of the 7R big hit game, that is, the timing when the V round is finished. , Which of the confrontations A to D is to be executed, and whether the confrontation effect to be executed is the victory pattern of the teammate character (friendship character victory effect) or the defeat pattern (teammate character defeat production). I am supposed to.

Specifically, in the third embodiment, first, in S4604 of the specific effect start process (S4302) shown in FIG. 46, effects that configure the VS chance effect, that is, "introduction effect", "selection effect" and "confrontation effect". Of these, the effect patterns of “introduction effects 1 to 3” shown in FIGS. 53B to 53D and “selection effect 1” shown in FIG. 53E are set. Thereafter, a specific effect start command for starting the VS chance effect is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4605), and the set specific effect start command is set by the command transmission process (S4006). When transmitted to the image control board 100, the introduction effect 1 shown in FIG. 53( b) is started on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. After that, until the second round of the 7R big hit game ends, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, according to the progress of the game, the effects shown in FIGS. 53(c) to (e) (introduction effect 2 to selection effect 1). Is done. Then, when the second round of the 7R jackpot game is finished, it is determined which of the confrontation effects to be executed this time, the confrontation effects A to D, and the determined confrontation is selected as shown in FIG. 53(f). After showing as a result (selection effect 2), a confrontation effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see FIGS. 54(g) to (h1) and (h2)). The determination and execution of this confrontation effect are realized by the received command analysis processing of the second embodiment performed by the effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control unit 90). The received command analysis process of the third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. The received command analysis processing of the third embodiment is the same as the received command analysis processing (S4301) of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, but the processing shown in FIG. 44 (processing after S4412) is shown in FIG. 61. The processing is replaced by S4395 to S4411 in FIG. 43, and S4412, S4413 and S4414 to S4416 in FIG. 44 are the same in the third embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted. Incidentally, in FIG. 61, the same step number as in the first embodiment is attached to the processing content common to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the received command analysis processing of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round end command is received from the main control board 80 (S4450), and when it is determined that the round end command is not received (NO in S4450). ), the process shifts to S4414, and if it is determined that it has been received (YES in S4450), it is determined whether or not the finished round is two rounds (S4451). The round end command sent from the main control board 80 includes information capable of specifying which round is the round to be ended (end round), like the above-described round start command. The effect control microcomputer 91 specifies the number of rounds of the end round based on the received round end command. Then, when it is determined that the finished round is not two rounds (NO in S4451), this processing is finished as it is. Here, in the third embodiment, when the round end command is received from the main control board 80, in response to this, a command indicating how many rounds have been completed is transmitted to the image control board 100. Is not configured. This is because the CPU of the image control board 100 can specify the current number of rounds by transmitting a round designation command to the image control board 100 at least by the process of S4415 regardless of the type of big hit. This is because it is possible to grasp the progress of the game and to execute the effect when the effect corresponding to the progress of the big hit game is performed. Of course, similar to the case where the round start command is received from the main control board 80, a command for designating the number of end rounds is transmitted to the image control board 100 based on the reception of the round end command, and the effect display corresponding to the command is transmitted. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4451 that the finished round is two rounds (YES in S4451), it is determined whether the V passage flag is ON (S4452), and it is determined that it is ON. (YES in S4452), it means that the game ball has passed through the specific area 39 in the V round (V passage), so a table for determining the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the passage (V passage confrontation effect pattern determination table). Is set (S4453), the V passage flag is turned off (S4454), and the process proceeds to S4455. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4452 that the V passage flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in S4452), it means that the game ball has not passed the specific area 39 in the V round (V not passed). Therefore, a table (V non-passing confrontation effect pattern determination table) is set to determine the confrontation effect pattern corresponding to the non-passage (S4457), and the process proceeds to S4455. Then, in the third embodiment, as the random number for confrontation effect determination (random number range: 0 to 99) is provided as the various random numbers for effect determination acquired in S4501 of FIG. 45, in S4455, the confrontation acquired in S4501. Based on the effect determination random number and the confrontation effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, a confrontation effect pattern corresponding to V passage or V non-passage is selected and set (S4455).

Here, the confrontation effect pattern determination table will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, there are a table for V passage and a table for V non-passage in the confrontation effect pattern determination table, and in each table, each of confrontations A to D and a random value for confrontation effect determination. The correspondence is determined. In each of the production patterns of the confrontations A to D corresponding to the passage of V, the production mode from the start to the end (the end) of the confrontation scene is a ally character victory (victory pattern), and V is not passed. Each of the production patterns of the corresponding confrontations A to D is the one in which the production mode from the start to the end (end) of the confrontation scene is defeated by an ally character (defeat pattern). In the third embodiment, the confrontations A to D corresponding to V passage and the confrontations A to D corresponding to non-V passage have different selection rates (appearance rates). Specifically, as the confrontation effect pattern selected in the case of passing V, the confrontation D has the highest selection rate (50%), and hereinafter, confrontation C (30%), confrontation B (15%), and confrontation A. The selectivity decreases in the order of (5%). On the other hand, as the confrontation effect pattern selected when V has not passed, the confrontation A has the highest selection rate (50%), and hereinafter, confrontation B (30%), confrontation C (15%), and confrontation D (5). %) in the order of decreasing selectivity. As a result, for example, when the confrontation D is selected as the confrontation effect pattern and the confrontation effect of the confrontation D is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V increases, and the confrontation A is selected as the confrontation effect pattern. When the showdown effect of the showdown A is executed on the display screen 7a, the possibility of passing V becomes low. For example, depending on the type of the showdown game, the game state after the jackpot game is finished is "probability variation game state ( It is possible to change the reliability (expectation) of the probability variation (V passage). In the third embodiment, with respect to all the effect patterns of the confrontations A to D, the selection rates are different between the case of V passage and the case of V non-passage, but the case of V passage and V non-passage The case where the selection rate is the same as in the above case may be included in the confrontation effect pattern determination table. In this way, for the player, whether or not the possibility of V passage in the big hit this time is high or low, that is, whether the game state after the end of the big hit game is likely to be "probability variation game state (probability variation mode)" It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to guess whether it is low or not, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In S4455, from the competition effect pattern determination table set in S4453 or S4457, the competition effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number for competition effect determination acquired in S4501 is selected, and the selected competition effect pattern is set. .. Next, in S4456, the confrontation effect designation command indicating the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4456). When the set confrontation effect designating command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission processing (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 determines the confrontation effect (confrontation) specified based on the received confrontation effect designating command. Any one of A to D) is displayed on the display screen 7a as a confrontation effect to be executed this time. At this time, the display mode of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 changes from the selection effect 1 (roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53(e) to the selection effect 2 (result display of roulette effect) shown in FIG. 53(f). .. The switching display from the selection effect 1 to the selection effect 2 is performed after the end of the second round until the start of the third round, that is, in the interval period between the second round and the third round.

After this, at the start of the third round (YES in S4414 → YES in S4415 → S4416), a confrontation effect start command is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in S4458 (S4458). When the set confrontation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU of the image control board 100 indicates the selection effect 2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The type of confrontation effect (any one of confrontation A to D), that is, the confrontation scene based on the confrontation effect pattern set in S4455 is displayed (see FIG. 54). After that, the CPU of the image control board 100 receives various commands such as a round start command and a round end command from the sub-control board 90, and ends this big hit game (7R big hit game), that is, the final round. The end of the confrontation effect based on the present confrontation effect pattern (friend character victory effect or ally character defeat effect) is displayed by the end of.

In the configuration of the third embodiment as described above, after the result of the V round, that is, the V passage or the V non-passage in the V round is determined, the confrontation effect (confrontation) performed in the VS chance effect based on the result. Since the effect pattern (any one of the confrontations A to D) of the scene) is determined, it is possible to set the reliability of the positive change (V passage) in the confrontation effect. As a result, before the V round ends, by displaying a plurality of production patterns (confrontation A to D) of the confrontation production that can be selected on the display screen 7a, the confrontation production with high reliability is selected. It is possible to fuel the expectation of the player. As a result, it becomes possible to improve amusement of interest when the VS chance presentation is performed, in particular, amusement of interest from the selection effect to the confrontation effect.

In the third embodiment, the selection (decision) of the confrontation effect pattern is specifically performed between the second round and the third round (interval period) after the second round (V round) of the 7R big hit game is completed. Although it is supposed to be performed, the time for selecting the confrontation effect pattern is not limited to this. That is, at least after the result of V round (V passing/V non-passing) is determined, it is possible to appropriately select the confrontation effect pattern. Specifically, in the above-described first embodiment, the movable piece 150 operates for 80 ms only 80 ms after the first opening of the V attacker in the V round (two rounds) at the planned V passage jackpot (opening start of 16000 ms) ( The specific area is opened, then the non-operating state (specific area is closed), and then the operating state (specific area is opened) again. The operation mode of the movable piece 150 is, for example, set to an operating state (specific area opening) 80 ms after the first opening of the V attacker (opening of 16000 ms), the state is maintained for 5000 ms, and a non-operating state after 5000 ms elapses ( As a specific area closed), if the operation state is not set thereafter, the operation control of the movable piece 150 ends before the first opening (opening of 16000 ms) of the V attacker ends, and thereafter the game ball is specified. There is no possibility of passing through the area 39. In this case, the result of the V round (V passing/V non-passing) is settled before the V round (2 rounds) is finished, and the time from the set point to the start of the next round is related to the determination and selection of the confrontation effect pattern. It can be used as the execution time of the effect (selection effect). Alternatively, among the remaining rounds after the completion of 2 rounds (V rounds), the confrontation effect pattern is selected (determined) in any round except at least the final round (7 rounds in the embodiment), and the selection is made. It is also possible to perform an effect based on the (decision) result (an effect indicating the selection result, a confrontation effect based on the selection result (result notification effect), etc.).

In addition, a case may be provided in which the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39 in the V round. Even in this case, the result of the V round (V passing/V non-passing) is settled before the V round (2 rounds) is finished, and the time from the set point to the start of the next round is decided or selected for the confrontation effect pattern. It is possible to use it as the execution time of the effect (for example, the selected effect). In addition, when the confrontation effect pattern is selected at the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 39, the selection timing of the confrontation effect pattern may be advanced or delayed depending on the passage timing. It is also possible to change the production mode of the production (selection production) related to the determination and selection of the production pattern. By doing so, for example, in the case of passing V, before displaying the result of the selective effect (selective effect 2) or displaying the result of the selective effect (selective effect 2) compared to the case of not passing the V. It is possible to provide an effect mode that suggests V pass confirmation in advance, such as performing a notice effect indicating V pass confirmation at the stage of. It is desirable to set such an effect mode as a so-called “premier effect”. About these "timing of selection (decision) of confrontation production pattern", any one timing may be fixedly set, or a random number lottery triggered by jackpot winning or jackpot game start, or jackpot. The timing of selection (determination) may be determined each time based on various conditions such as the type of symbol.

Although the first to third embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the aspect of the symbol definite effect (fourth effect) when the effect symbol 8 is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) during the execution of the VS chance (introduction effect) related to the 7R big hit, the effect symbol 8 Is displayed in a corner of the display screen 7a with a smaller display size than usual, and the fixed display time is set to a short time (500 ms), and the fixed display time elapses (transition from introduction effect 2 to introduction effect 3). By making the effect design 8 disappear from the display screen 7a, it is difficult to recognize the symbol finalization effect, but the mode that makes it difficult to recognize the symbol finalization effect is not limited to the embodiment. .. For example, the finalized display time of the effect design 8 is further shortened, the color of the effect design 8 is lighter than usual, or semitransparent, the number of digits (number) of the effect design 8 is reduced, or the effect design 8 It is difficult to recognize the symbol finalization effect by each element such as the display size of the effect symbol 8, the fixed display time, the display position, the type, the content, the shape, etc. It can be an aspect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, with respect to the effect patterns of “introduction effect” and “selection effect” that constitute the VS chance effect (specific effect), except for effect scenes (selection effect 2) showing the selection results of the confrontations A to D. Although the description has been given assuming that there is one effect pattern, a plurality of effect patterns for the “introduction effect” and the “selection effect” are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the image data related thereto are stored in the image control board. It is assumed that they are stored in the ROM (image ROM) of 100, and one or both of the "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" are selected at the start of the VS chance effect, and the selected effect pattern is selected. The "introduction effect" and the "selection effect" may be performed based on. For example, depending on the effect pattern, the character image that appears in the introduction effect is different, the background image of the introduction effect or the selection effect is different, or the mode of the selection effect is different (for example, roulette effect or darts effect). It is possible to provide the effect pattern of. This makes it possible to diversify the specific effect. Further, regarding the “confrontation effect” that constitutes the VS chance effect (specific effect), in the above-described embodiment, the confrontation effect (confrontation scene) is started with the start of the third round, but in the third round. It is not necessary to start the confrontation effect with the start, and for example, the above-described selection effect may be performed even after the third round is started, and then the confrontation effect may be started. That is, the start timing of the confrontation effect may be a predetermined time after the result of the previous V round is fixed, and in the above-described embodiment, after the start of the third round and before the end of the seventh round. It may be a predetermined time.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second big winning opening is made up of one round and two rounds of "7R fourth big hit" and one round of "7R fifth big hit". By making the opening and closing operation of 35 (V attacker) the same and letting the player recognize these rounds as one "chance round", when the chance round is started, "7R fourth jackpot" and "7R It has been configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the "fifth big hits" has occurred. Then, in the 7R 4th jackpot, the V attacker opens after the second and subsequent opening, and when the interval period ends, the round 3 advances, while in the 7R 5th jackpot, the V attacker opens after the 2nd and later opening. When the period ended, the process proceeded to 2 rounds (V round), and after the V attacker was released for a short time (100 ms) in that round, it proceeded to 3 rounds (see FIG. 49). For this reason, until the “chance round” is completed, the V attacker opening/closing operation mode is the same between “7R 4th big hit” and “7R 5th big hit”, but after that, when proceeding to the 3rd round. The opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker is slightly different from each other, and the opening/closing operation modes of the 1-round and 2-round V attackers are not completely the same.

On the other hand, by completely matching the opening and closing operation modes of the 1st and 2nd rounds of the V attacker between the “7R 4th jackpot” and the “7R 5th jackpot”, the “7R 4th jackpot” and the 7R 5th jackpot It is also possible to make it more difficult to distinguish "big hit". Specifically, for example, in the opening pattern shown in FIG. 49, the final opening of the V attacker in the second round of the “7R fourth big hit” is performed with an opening time (instantaneous opening/closing) of 100 ms (0.1 seconds). By performing the final opening of the V attacker of the first round of "7R 5th big hit" as one opening of the second round with 100 ms (0.1 seconds) opening time (instantaneous opening and closing) , V attacker opening and closing operation modes can be perfectly matched. As a result, it becomes extremely difficult to determine which of the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fifth big hit” has occurred by the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker. Even in this case, the VS chance effect (specific effect) is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 until the second round ends (until the third round starts), as in the above-described embodiment. This makes it difficult to determine whether the “7R fourth big hit” or the “7R fifth big hit” has occurred, even through the effect display. As a result, at least until the second round is finished (until the third round is started), it is extremely difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39, the presence or absence of passing, and the like. Becomes

However, as in the above-described embodiment, the opening and closing operation modes of the 1st round and the 2nd round of the V attacker are not completely the same for the “7R 4th big hit” and the “7R 5th big hit”, and the 3rd round after the chance round. Although it is difficult to determine whether the "7R 4th big hit" or the "7R 5th big hit" has occurred by slightly changing the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker when proceeding to step 3, the third round starts from the end of the chance round. By paying attention to the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker during the period, the determination can be made for the time being. Although it is difficult to discriminate the type of 7R jackpot and the presence or absence of passage of a game ball into the specific area 39 by leaving such a room for discrimination, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of overlooking it. Becomes Regarding the match/mismatch of the opening and closing operation modes of the 1st and 2nd round V attackers, not only the 7R big hit but also the “12R second and third big hits” and the “2R seventh and eighth big hits” in the above-described embodiment. The same applies to “(“V pass big hit” and “V non-pass big hit”, which have the same number of rounds).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit and the disengagement are provided as the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is hit, but in addition to this, the "small hit" may be provided. However, the opening time in the case of opening the big winning opening in the special game related to the small hit (small hit game) is not a long time (for example, 30 seconds) like the big hit, but a short time (for example, 1.8 seconds). .. When such a small hit is provided, for example, a "2R big hit" is provided as a hit for opening the special winning opening twice in 0.9 seconds, and the "small hit" and the "2R big hit" are distinguished (determined). By making the 2R big hit the above-mentioned "V passing planned big hit (probability change big hit)", it is possible to obtain so-called "latent latency change" game playability. Moreover, when performing the small hit game which opens the 2nd special winning opening 35, the movable piece 150 is not operated during the said small hit game. That is, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 during the small hit game, and the high probability state is not given based on the occurrence of the small hit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the valid period of the specific region 39 is set to 1000 ms after the specific region opening/closing operation pattern is being executed and the specific region is in the open state, and from the open state to the closed state. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, all the valid periods may be set during the execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern, or all the periods after the first opening state during the execution of the specific area opening/closing operation pattern are valid periods. In addition to these, a predetermined period after the end of the specific region opening/closing operation pattern may be set as the effective period.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, except for the 15R big hit, the V attacker of the first round to the second round of the big hit game related to the V passing planned big hit (12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 2R seventh big hit) ( The 1st round of the big hit game related to the opening pattern of the 2nd big winning opening 35) (including the interval period between rounds) and the V non-passing big hit (12R 3rd big hit, 7R 5th big hit, 2R 8th big hit) The opening pattern of the V attacker of No. 2 was the same pattern, and it was difficult to distinguish the first round to the second round of the big V scheduled jackpot and the first round of the non-V passed big jack in appearance. In other words, just by looking at the opening and closing operation of the V attacker when the chance round is started, is it possible that the chance round is due to the V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit), or the V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R It was difficult to distinguish whether it was due to 5 big hits). Regarding the number of rounds constituting this chance round, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the first round and the second round are 2 rounds in total, but the number of rounds is limited to 2 rounds such as 3 rounds and 4 rounds. Not a thing. For example, the rounds that make up the chance round are a total of three rounds from the first round to the third round, and the second round is the V round (specific round), but the first round and the third round are opened by the V attacker. It may be a round in which the movable piece 150 does not operate (non-specific round). In this case, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the V round (2nd round) of the planned V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) is set as a pattern with a high possibility of entering the game ball (a pattern that allows easy entry). , V unscheduled big hit (eg, 7R fifth big hit) V attacker in the V round (2nd round) is set as a pattern with a low possibility of entering a game ball (a pattern that is difficult to enter) Then, the V attacker opening pattern from the first round to the third round of the V passing jackpot (a mode of opening and closing operation) and the V attacker opening pattern from the 1st to the 3rd round of the V non-passing jackpot ( The opening pattern of the V attacker for the first round and the third round of both jackpots may be set so that the same manner (opening/closing operation) is achieved. In other words, there is a difference in the opening time of the V attacker in the V round between the planned V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit), but the time difference is the remaining non-specification. The rounds are used to match the opening patterns of the V attacker's open pattern so that the V attacker's open patterns of both jackpots are matched. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (Modification 1) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 63.

FIG. 63 is a V attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round according to the modification 1 of “7R fourth big hit” as a V passing big hit and “7R fifth big hit” as a V non-passing big hit ( Open pattern). In this modification 1, for both the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fifth big hit”, the V attacker opening patterns of the first round and the second round are the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fourth big hit” of the above-described embodiment. 7R fifth big hit”, but the third round is different from the above-mentioned embodiment. In the above-mentioned embodiment, the special winning opening opened in the third round is the first special winning opening 30, but in the first modification, the V attacker (the second special winning opening 35) is used instead of the first big winning opening 30. The third round is a non-specific round (a round in which the movable piece 15 does not operate). Then, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round of "7R 4th big hit" is set to the 3rd round with the interval period (2000ms) sandwiched between the V attacker short opening (100ms) of the 2nd round of "7R 5th big hit". The pattern is the same as the V-attacker opening operation for the eyes. In other words, the first V attacker opening in the 3rd round of "7R 4th big hit" is performed in the same manner as the V attacker opening of the 2nd round of "7R 5th big hit", and the 3rd round of "7R 4th big hit". It is assumed that the second and subsequent V attacker releases in the eye are performed in the same manner as the V attacker release in the third round of "7R fifth big hit". In this modification 1, the third round V attacker opening of the "7R fifth big hit" is similar to the second round V attacker opening of the "7R fourth big hit" (similar to the above-described embodiment). It is supposed to be done in. That is, after opening the V-attacker until 16000 ms (16 seconds) has passed from the start of the round, 1000 ms (1 second) is closed once, and 1000 ms (1 second) is opened once. One opening for 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two opening for 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in this order.

According to this modified example 1, it is possible to completely match the opening/closing operation of the V attacker from the start of one round to the end of three rounds with the “7R fourth big hit” and the “7R fifth big hit”. This makes it impossible to visually determine whether the “7R fourth big hit” or the “7R fifth big hit” has occurred, through the opening/closing operation of the V attacker. In the first modification, until the third round ends, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing the specific effect (VS chance effect) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect display is performed. , "7R fourth big hit" and "7R fifth big hit" are difficult to determine (impossible). When the above-described specific effect (VS chance effect) is performed in the present modification 1, for example, the timing of starting the second V attacker opening in the third round in the 7R fourth big hit, the third round in the 7R fifth big hit. The control (display control) for advancing the specific effect may be performed such that the eye starts (at the timing of the first V attacker opening start, the confrontation effect (result notification effect) shown in FIG. 54 is started. As a result, also in the present modification 1, it is possible to increase the difficulty (difficulty) of determining the 7R jackpot type from both aspects of the opening/closing operation mode of the V attacker and the effect display mode, and at least the result notification of the third round It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to determine (detect) whether or not a game ball can pass through the specific area 39 before the result of the previous V round (chance round) is shown by the effect. Possible).

In the modified example 1, the opening pattern of the second and subsequent V attackers in the third round of the “7R fourth big hit” and the opening pattern of the V attacker of the third round of the “7R fifth big hit” are the same as those described above. The present invention is not limited to this, and the mode is not particularly limited as long as it is difficult to determine the type of the big hit (substantially impossible). Further, in the "7R fourth big hit" and the "7R fifth big hit" of the modified example 1, the round game after the fourth round may be, for example, the round game after the third round of the above-mentioned embodiment, Alternatively, the round game after the fourth round in the above-described embodiment may be played.

Further, in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 63, the first round and the third round following the second round (V round) are set as non-specific rounds, and a V passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and V non-passing The mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker in the first round to the third round was matched with the planned big hit (for example, the 7R fifth big hit), but not the three rounds of the first round to the third round, but the first round. It is also possible to match the modes of the opening/closing operation of the V attacker by using two rounds (non-specific round) and the second round (V round). That is, the mode of opening/closing operation of the V attacker is also achieved by the configuration in which the first opening (100 ms opening) in the third round of the 7R fourth big hit shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed as the final opening of the second round. It is possible to match. Specifically, the 100 ms release that exists after the final 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 is performed not as the third round but as the second round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the upper part of FIG. 63 becomes the closing time of the V attacker of the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms of the third round in the upper part of the figure becomes the interval. .. As described above, when the V round is the second round, the first round to the third round depending on the setting mode (combination) of the opening patterns of the V attacker in the specific round of the second round and the subsequent non-specific round. In addition to the eyes, also in the first round to the second round, the mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker is made to match between the V passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit) It becomes possible. Then, by matching the opening and closing operations of the V attacker in the first round to the second round, it becomes possible to use the first special winning opening 30 instead of the V attacker in the third round, and the V attacker opening pattern can be used. It is possible to widen the range of round game design while ensuring that it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second round is the V round including the modified example 1, but the round to be the V round is not limited to the second round, and what round is the V round. It does not matter in particular. It is difficult to determine from the opening/closing operation (opening pattern) of the V attacker which of the planned V big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passed big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit) has occurred. If it is possible (substantially impossible), any number of rounds may be V rounds. In other words, the configuration in which the non-specific round exists before the specific round (V round), the configuration in which the non-specific round exists after the specific round (V round), or the specific round (V It is possible to adopt various configurations such as a configuration in which non-specific rounds exist before and after the (round). Specifically, for example, the third round may be V round, or the first round may be V round. If the third round is the V round, for example, the V attacker opening of the first round and the second round of the "7R fourth big hit" of the above-described embodiment is performed in a short time (for example, 100 ms). The V attacker may be opened in the same manner as in the second round of the 7R fourth big hit in the above-described embodiment. Then, in the same manner as the opening/closing operation of the V attacker in the first round to the third round, the opening/closing operation of the V attacker in the first round to the third round of the “7R fifth jackpot” may be performed. Further, after that, the specific effect (VS chance effect) similar to that in the above-described embodiment may be performed until the end of the third round. By doing so, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the above-described embodiment.

Alternatively, when the first round is the V round, as in the case of the modification example 1 described above, the first round starts with the V passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit). It is possible to completely match the modes of the opening and closing operation of the V attacker up to the end of three rounds so that the type of jackpot that has occurred cannot be determined. The opening pattern of the V attacker according to such a configuration (Modification 2) will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 64 is a V attacker opening operation from the first round to the third round in the modified example 2 of “7R fourth big hit” as a V passing big hit and “7R fifth big hit” as a V non-passing big hit ( Open pattern). Here, in this modified example 2, the first round of the big hit game is a V round (specific round), the second round and the third round are non-specific rounds, and the opening of the V attacker in the first round is started (first opening). The operation control of the movable piece 150 is started at the timing of (start). The operation control of the movable piece 15 (the operation pattern of the movable piece 150) is the same as that in the above-described embodiment. That is, when 80 ms has elapsed from the opening start (round start) of the V attacker in the first round, the operating state (moving piece solenoid 151 is turned on) for 80 ms and then the non-operating state (moving piece solenoid 151 is turned off), When 2840 ms (about 2.8 seconds) have passed in that state, the operating state (movable piece solenoid 151 is turned on) is set again, and this state is maintained until a maximum of 26000 ms (26 seconds) has passed (see FIG. 50). reference).

Further, in the 7R fourth big hit (V big hit planned big hit) of the present modification 2, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 64, the V attacker is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) from the start of the first round, and then, After closing for 2000 ms (2 seconds), the V attacker is opened for 16000 ms (16 seconds) (second opening). After this, the V-attacker opening/closing operation similar to that of the above-described embodiment, that is, 1000 ms (1 second) opening, and 1000 ms (1 second) opening once, after 16000 ms (16 seconds) opening completion. One opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds) and two opening of 1000 ms (1 second) are performed in sequence. Then, as described above, in the second modification, the movable piece 150 is continuously in the operating state when 3000 ms (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the first round. Therefore, in the “V passing big hit” of the modified example 2, after 900 ms have elapsed since the second V attacker opening (opening of 16000 ms) in the first round was started, that is, after 16000 ms (16 seconds). For 15100 ms (about 15 seconds), the movable piece 150 is in the operating state (specific area open), and the game ball entering the V attacker can pass through the specific area 39. In addition, after the end of the first round, the V attacker is opened for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) in the second round, which is performed after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds), and then the interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds) is released. After that, the V attacker of the third round is opened. The opening (opening/closing operation) of the V attacker in the third round is performed in the same pattern as the opening/closing operation of the V attacker in the first round after the second time.

On the other hand, in the 7R fifth big hit (V non-passing big hit) of the present modification 2, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 64, the V attacker is set in the first round which is the V round (the specific round in which the movable piece 150 operates). Open for 100 ms (0.1 seconds) and finish the first round. Therefore, in the first round (V round) of the V non-passing jackpot, only 20 ms remaining in the opening time of the V attacker overlaps with the operation period (operation state) of the movable piece 150, and the opening time of 100 ms is required. Not only is the possibility of the game ball entering the opening V attacker extremely low, but the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is also extremely low. The opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round is the same as the opening (opening/closing) of the first V attacker in the first round of the 7R fourth big hit. When the first round is completed, the V attacker of the second round is released after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The V attacker opening pattern in the second round is the same as the V attacker opening (opening/closing) in the second round and thereafter in the first round of the 7R fourth big hit. Therefore, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round of the 7R fourth jackpot is the same as the opening pattern of the V attacker in the first round and the second round of the 7R fifth jackpot. When the second round is completed, the V attacker is opened in the third round after an interval period of 2000 ms (2 seconds). The opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round is the same as the opening pattern of the V attacker in the second round to the third round (including the interval period) of the 7R fourth big hit.

As described above, in the second modification, as is clear from FIG. 64, the "7R fourth big hit" as the V passing big hit and the "7R fifth big hit" as the V non-passing big hit make one round. The mode (opening pattern) of the opening/closing operation of the V attacker from the start to the end of the third round is the same. Accordingly, also in the second modification, similarly to the first modification described above, it is visually determined through the opening/closing operation of the V attacker whether the “7R fourth big hit” or the “7R fifth big hit” has occurred. Becomes impossible. Also in the second modification, until the third round ends, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing the specific effect (VS chance effect) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, through the effect display. Also, it is difficult (substantially impossible) to determine whether the “7R fourth big hit” or the “7R fifth big hit” has occurred. As a result, also in the second modification, when a 7R big hit occurs, the possibility of passing a game ball to the specific area 39, the presence or absence of passing, etc. by at least the third round (by the end of the chance round). It is extremely difficult (substantially impossible) to distinguish (see through). In Modification 2, the opening pattern of the V attacker in the third round of the “7R fourth big hit” and the opening pattern of the V attacker of the second and subsequent rounds in the third round of the “7R fifth big hit” are the same as those described above. The present invention is not limited to this, and the mode is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to make it difficult to determine the type of the big hit (substantially impossible). Further, the round games after the fourth round of the "7R fourth big hit" and the "7R fifth big hit" of the present modification 2 can be dealt with in the same manner as the modification 1 described above.

In Modification 2 shown in FIG. 64, the second round and the third round subsequent to the first round (V round) are non-specific rounds, and the V passing big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing big hit are planned. The opening and closing operations of the V attacker in the first round to the third round were matched with the big hit (for example, the 7R fifth big hit), but not in the three rounds of the first round to the third round, but in the first round ( It is also possible to match the modes of the opening/closing operation of the V attacker by using the two rounds of the V round) and the second round (non-specific round). That is, the mode of opening/closing operation of the V attacker is also achieved by a configuration in which the first opening (opening of 100 ms) in the third round of the 7R fifth jackpot shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed as the final opening of the second round. It is possible to match. Specifically, the 100 ms release that exists after the final 1000 ms release of the second round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is performed not as the third round but as the second round. In this case, the interval between the second round and the third round shown in the lower part of FIG. 64 is the closing time of the V attacker of the second round, and the closing time of 2000 ms of the third round in the lower part of FIG. 64 is the interval. .. As described above, when the V round is the first round, the first round to the third round depending on the setting mode (combination) of the opening patterns of the V attacker in the specific round of the first round and the subsequent non-specific round. In addition to the eyes, also in the first round to the second round, the mode of opening and closing operation of the V attacker is made to coincide with the V passing planned big hit (for example, 7R fourth big hit) and the V non-passing big hit (for example, 7R fifth big hit). It becomes possible. Then, by matching the opening and closing operations of the V attacker in the first round to the second round, it becomes possible to use the first special winning opening 30 instead of the V attacker in the third round, and the V attacker opening pattern can be used. It is possible to widen the range of round game design while ensuring that it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, with respect to the V attacker opening pattern (opening/closing operation mode), except for the 15R big hit, the big hit game related to the V passing big hit (12R second big hit, 7R fourth big hit, 2R seventh big hit) The opening pattern of the 2nd round and the opening pattern of the 2nd or later of the 1st round of the big hit game related to the V non-passing big hit (12R 3rd big hit, 7R 5th big hit, 2R 8th big hit) are all the same I was trying. That is, all of a plurality of V attacker openings in the second round (V round) of the planned V passing jackpot and all of the second and subsequent V out of the plurality of V attacker opening in the first round of the V non-passing jackpot. , The same aspect (see FIG. 49). However, it is not necessary for all V attacker releases to be the same. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, the first V attacker opening in the second round of the planned V passage jackpot and the second V attacker opening in the first round of the V non-passing jackpot are set to 16000 ms (16 seconds). It was supposed to be done once. Here, the firing performance (firing speed) of a game ball in a pachinko gaming machine is generally designed so that one (100 in one minute) game ball can be launched in 600 ms (0.6 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to shoot 10 game balls in 6000 ms (6 seconds) from the calculation. For this reason, during the big hit game, with the exception of the interruption of the game ball firing and the ball clogging, as long as the game ball is normally fired (right hitting in this example), it will be released during 16000 ms (16 seconds). , V attackers can enter 10 game balls, that is, a specified number of game balls that are conditions for ending the round. From this, as long as the V-attacker continues to shoot the game ball during the opening of the 16000 ms (16 seconds) opening, there is a possibility that the round end condition will be satisfied during the opening and the game will advance to the next round. Even if the round end condition is not satisfied during the opening, the round end condition is satisfied by the subsequent opening of 4000 ms (4 seconds), and there is a high possibility of proceeding to the next round. For this reason, the V attacker is released after the second round in the second round of the big V scheduled jackpot (see FIG. 49) and the V attacker is opened in the third round and later (see the FIG. 49) of the first round of the big V unscheduled jackpot. The chances of being struck are low. In other words, there is a high possibility that the player will advance to the next round before all of the V attacker releases are completed. Based on this, based on at least the specified number of balls, of the V attacker opening multiple times in the second round of the big V scheduled jackpot and the V attacker opening multiple times in the first round of the V non-passing jackpot. By setting the opening patterns up to the opening times at which the round ending condition can be satisfied to be the same pattern, it becomes possible to achieve the gaming characteristics and the operational effects of the above-described embodiment.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the V attacker opening pattern in the V round, a long opening opening pattern having a long opening time (first opening pattern) and a short opening opening pattern having a short opening time (second opening pattern). And were set up. Specifically, as an opening pattern for long opening (a V round opening pattern for a planned V passage big hit), an opening pattern in which 16000 ms opening once, 1000 ms opening once, 4000 ms opening once and 1000 ms opening twice are performed in this order. (Opening pattern of opening time 23000 ms) is provided, and as an opening pattern of short-circuiting opening (V round opening pattern of V non-passing big hit), opening pattern s opening twice for 100 ms and opening twice for opening in this order (Opening pattern of opening time 100 ms) was provided. Of these, regarding the opening pattern of long opening, it is sufficient if it is an opening time capable of increasing the possibility of entering the game ball into the V attacker (facilitating entry), and the number of times of opening is multiple times. It may be either once or once. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of difficulty (difficulty) in distinguishing between the V-passing big hit and the non-passing big hit, it is desirable that the number of times of opening is plural times. Incidentally, the opening pattern of multiple opening in V round is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modification, and the number of opening of multiple opening is appropriately set in consideration of the difficulty of distinguishing the big hit type. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the opening time of the V attacker when the first round is performed as a non-specific round, the V attacker opening time of the first round (first non-specific round) of the expected V passing jackpot and the V unattended time are not. The opening time related to the first opening of the V attacker in the first round (second non-specific round) of the expected big hit is set to a short time of 100 ms (0.1 seconds), and the game ball enters the V attacker. The possibility of doing so was low (substantially impossible). However, the opening time of the V attacker in this case may be longer than 100 ms, or may be the time that allows the game ball to enter the V attacker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the chance round is performed from the start of the big hit game, that is, the chance round is performed in the first round to the second round (in the modified example, the first round to the third round) is illustrated. However, the chance round may be performed during the big hit game or at the end of the big hit game. That is, the opening operation of the V attacker related to the chance round can be performed not only in the first round to the second round (the first round to the third round in the modified example) but also in other rounds. Further, for all jackpot games, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 35 (V attacker) are not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and the present invention Various patterns can be adopted without departing from the scope of the invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect mode of the ending effect in the set ending period is not limited to that described above. As another aspect of the ending effect, the following may be performed. For example, the 2R seventh jackpot of the embodiment is a “V passing planned jackpot”, and has the same number of rounds (2 rounds) as the 2R eighth jackpot which is a “V non-passing jackpot”. In these effects during the big hit game, a common effect is executed so that it is difficult to recognize whether it is the 2R seventh big hit or the 2R eighth big hit, so that the effect executed in the ending period (the sixth specific effect or You may make it show the game state which shifts after the big hit game end by a 7th specific production|generation. Specifically, during the ending period of 6000 ms for the 7th big hit of the 2R, once (within 3900 ms), the third non-report mode transition effect (for example, defeat effect) common to the 8th big hit of the 2R is executed, and the rest in the ending period. In the period of, it is possible to perform an effect (for example, promotion effect, revival effect) that indicates a transition to the high probability state.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the specific round game may be one round game or a plurality of round games among the plurality of round games which form the special game. When a plurality of round games are specified round games, it is possible to determine the end period based on the specific area information after the last specified round game in the special game is completed. For example, it can be determined based on the end of the last specific round game, based on the start of the next round game of the last specific round game, or based on the end of all round games. Is. Further, in the case of a big hit (specific result) that does not change the end period by passing or not passing the specific area 39, at a timing different from the big hit (specific result) that changes the end period by passing or not passing the specific area 39, It may be determined which end period. For example, in the case of a big hit (specific result) that does not change the end period, the end period may be determined at a timing before the start of the specific round game (V round), or it may be determined with the start of the big hit game. Alternatively, it may be determined before the opening operation of the first round game in the big hit game is started. Of course, the end period may be determined at the same timing in the case of a big hit that does not change the end period and in the case of a big hit that changes the end period.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the big hit (specific result) for changing the end period by passing or not passing the specific area 39 is provided, but it is also possible to provide a big hit having a different mode of this change. For example, when the result of the hit determination is the first specific result, the end period is the tenth period when the game ball passes through the specific region, and the tenth period is the end period when the game ball does not pass through the specific region. The 11th period is shorter than that. Then, when the result of the hit determination is the third specific result, when the game ball passes through the specific region, the end period is set to a twelfth period different from the tenth period, and when the game ball does not pass through the specific region, the end ends. The period may be the 13th period shorter than the 12th period.

In the above-described embodiment, when the ending period (end period) is changed by passing or not passing the specific area 39, a long time is set when passing and a short time is set when not passing. It is not limited to such a mode. The ending period determining means determines a short time (second period) when the game ball passes through the specific region, and determines a long time (first period) when the game ball does not pass through the specific region. You may do so. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned win/no-judgment in the gaming machine becomes the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of different length is determined based on whether or not the special area is passed, and the win/no-judgment is made. When the result of 2 becomes the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length may be determined whether the specific region is passed or not.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the player is given a game privilege of generating a high-probability state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific region during the big hit game (during special game) has been illustrated. However, the privilege in the present invention is not limited to the occurrence of the high probability state. For example, a high base state in which a game ball enters the starting opening at a high frequency, a variation time shortening state in which the variation time of identification information is shorter than usual (time saving state), and the like, which gives some benefit to the player. If there is, the content (type) of the privilege does not matter. Further, one benefit may be given or a plurality of benefits may be given based on that the game ball has passed through the specific area. In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball entry possible state and game ball entry It is equipped with a special winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry state, and the big winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter for a predetermined time when the result of the success/failure determination based on the entry into the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters the special winning opening in the ball-possible state and the game ball passes through a specific area, it is a big hit, the big hit game is executed, and it is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko gaming machine is a so-called 1 type/2 type mixing machine, and when the result of the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting opening is a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the high probability state is generated based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area, "10000" is set to the probability variation counter, and the number of executions of the special symbol winning/judging determination is 10,000. Until the number of times, in other words, the next big hit occurs, the high probability state was guaranteed (so-called "V-probability loop machine"), but the value set in the probability variation counter is the gaming machine. It is possible to set it appropriately according to the specifications. For example, the value to be set in the probability variation counter based on that the game ball has passed a specific area is "150", and the number of executions of the special symbol hit/miss judgment in the high probability state is "150", and the special symbol after the next time. The present invention is applied to a gaming machine (so-called "V-probable ST machine") having specifications that make a decision on whether or not to make a win or win, that is, a high probability state is not guaranteed until the next big hit occurs. It is also possible. Alternatively, in addition to the probability variation counter, for example, a counter (big hit counter) that counts the number of big hits in a high probability state is provided, and the number of big hits (the count value of the big hit counter) is set to a predetermined number (eg, “5”). In this case, the present invention is applied to a gaming machine (so-called "V certainty set machine") of a specification that always (forcedly) becomes a low-probability state after the jackpot game related to the predetermined number of times (for example, "fifth time") is hit. Can also be applied.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the control process of prioritizing the second special figure hold to the first special figure hold, that is, the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, is not limited to this. May be a control process for prioritizing the second special figure reservation, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, the priority is not set for the completion of the first special map reservation and the completion of the second special map reservation, and the first special map reservation and the second special map reservation are sequentially deleted from the oldest stored one. It may be a control process, that is, a so-called entrance order (memory order) digestion control process.

In the gaming machine described above, a starting opening into which a game ball can enter, and a variable starting opening that can be changed into a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than in the first mode, At least one of them may be provided, and identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening or the variable starting opening may be provided. In addition, the variable winning entrance which can be changed into a possible entry state in which the game ball can enter and a non-enterable state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the first winning/absence determination based on the entry into the starting opening. The first hit/miss judgment means to be executed, the second hit/damage judgment means to execute the second hit/miss judgment based on a ball entering the variable start port, and the result of the first hit/miss judgment or the second hit/miss judgment is variable. It may be provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a ball entrance can be entered. Further, a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of entering the game balls into the variable start port is higher than that in the first game state. It may be provided with a game state setting means set to. Here, 0 is included in the “predetermined frequency”.

[Other]
In a conventional gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game, there is a possibility that a game ball will pass through a specific area, and a variable entrance relating to the passage of the game ball into the specific area (hereinafter also referred to as "specific variable entrance"). It is generally different depending on the opening pattern of. However, in the conventional configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the special game including the privilege determination game is started, so for the player, the opening of the specific variable entrance is triggered by the start of the special game. It becomes possible to watch the pattern (opening operation). Therefore, for example, there is a case where it is possible to determine the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. at an early stage when the specific variable ball entrance starts opening, that is, immediately after the start of the privilege determination game. .. In this way, if it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball can pass to a specific area immediately before the start of the privilege determination game, whether the result of the privilege determination game is obtained (before the end of the privilege determination game) or Before the result of the game is announced, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area, the presence or absence of passing, etc. will be known, which may lead to a decline in the interest of the privilege determination game and dilution of the existing value. is there. On the other hand, an invention that makes it difficult to recognize that a special game including a privilege determination game is started and improves the gaming enjoyment of a gaming machine equipped with a privilege determination game is described below (1) to An example is shown in (5).
(1) Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game,
A first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the variable display of the identification information;
Equipped with
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the first effect execution unit displays the first effect in the specific mode by stopping the identification information. A gaming machine characterized by ending after the start of the privilege determination game in the special game after being played.

In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The variable entrance is a non-enterable state in which a game ball cannot enter and a ball in which a game ball can enter, when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change into a possible state,
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, the first effect execution unit displays the first effect in the specific mode in which the identification information is stopped and displayed. It may be finished after the variable entrance has entered the state where it can enter at least once in the special game.

(2) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game,
A first effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined first effect during the special game;
Equipped with
When executing the first effect during the special game, the first effect execution means starts the first effect during variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and the first effect is executed. A gaming machine, wherein the effect is finished after the start of the privilege determination game in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The variable entrance is a non-enterable state in which a game ball cannot enter and a ball in which a game ball can enter, when the privilege determination game is executed and when the privilege determination game is not executed. It can change into a possible state,
When executing the first effect during the special game, the first effect execution means starts the first effect during variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and the first effect is executed. The effect may be finished after the variable entrance is in a state where it can enter at least once in the special game after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Second effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined second effect during the special game and after the end of the first effect;
A third effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined third effect during the variable display of the identification information;
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the second effect execution means can execute the second effect in the same effect mode as the third effect.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above,
The third effect execution means can execute the third effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes,
The second effect executing means can execute the second effect based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes similar to the third effect that can be executed by the third effect executing means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
A fourth effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined fourth effect based on the stop display of the identification information;
As an effect mode of the fourth effect when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode that is harder to recognize than the first effect mode,
The fourth effect execution means,
When the first effect is started during the variable display before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode during the execution of the first effect, the identification information A gaming machine characterized by performing the fourth effect based on a stop display in the second effect mode.

In a gaming machine equipped with a conventional privilege determination game, it is general to perform an effect for notifying a result of the privilege determination game (hereinafter, also referred to as “result notification effect”) during a special game. However, in the conventional result notification production, whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area at one time, such as when the privilege determination game is finished during the special game or when the result of the privilege determination game is confirmed. In many cases, the displayed image (for example, a character image such as “V”) is simply displayed. In this case, the effect of the effect that is performed during the special game including the privilege determination game cannot be sufficiently obtained, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be deteriorated. On the other hand, the invention which makes it possible to enhance the effect of the effect performed during the special game including the privilege determination game, and further to improve the gaming enjoyment of the gaming machine equipped with the privilege determination game, is described below. Examples are shown in (6) to (14).

(6) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game,
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game,
Equipped with
The special game effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing the special game effect in an effect mode showing a result of the privilege determining game during the special game after the privilege determining game is finished.

(7) In the gaming machine described in (6) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the special game effect executing means executes the special game effect in an effect mode that does not show a result of the privilege determination game during the special game before the privilege determination game ends.

(8) In the gaming machine described in (6) or (7) above,
And a production mode storage unit for storing a plurality of production modes of the special game production executed during the special game after the privilege determination game is finished,
The special game effect execution means executes the special game effect after the privilege determination game is completed, based on an effect mode selected from a plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means. A gaming machine characterized by.

(9) In the gaming machine described in (8) above,
In addition, as an effect mode showing the result of the privilege determination game, a passing mode showing that the game ball has passed through the specific region, and an unpassing mode showing that the game ball has not passed through the specific region, Have,
Each of the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage unit is provided with an effect mode corresponding to the passing mode and an effect mode corresponding to the non-passing mode. ..

(10) Identification information display means for variably displaying identification information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game,
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game,
Equipped with
The special game effect execution means starts a result notification effect indicating a result of the privilege determination game as the special game effect during the special game and after the privilege determination game is finished. ..

(11) In the gaming machine described in (10) above,
Storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes of the result notification effect,
Selecting means for selecting an effect mode of the result notification effect to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means;
Equipped with
The selection means selects a performance mode of the result notification performance before the end of the privilege determination game,
The special game effect executing means starts the result notification effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(12) In the gaming machine described in (11) above,
The special game effect executing means executes a selection effect indicating a result of selection by the selecting means as the special game effect before the end of the privilege determination game during the special game. Machine.

(13) In the gaming machine described in any one of (10) to (12) above,
The special game effect execution means executes the result notification effect that is started during the special game and after the end of the privilege determination game in a mode according to the result of the privilege determination game. ..
In the gaming machine described in any one of (10) to (13) above,
The special game effect executing means may execute the result notification effect that is started during the special game and after the end of the privilege determination game, as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determination game.

(14) In the gaming machine described in any one of (6) to (13) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from the end of the privilege determination game to the end of the special game is longer than the period from the start of the special game to the end of the privilege determination game.

Further, as a conventional gaming machine, with respect to awarding, a game ball that has entered a predetermined variable entrance during a special game is distributed to a specific area or a non-specific area by a distribution device in the variable entrance, 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a gaming machine that gives a privilege when a gaming ball passes through a specific area. If the distribution device is provided inside the variable ball entrance in this way, the game ball may be caught in the movable part of the distribution device, resulting in ball clogging. When such a situation occurs, in the worst case, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entrance cannot be distributed to the specific region side, and the player may miss the opportunity to grant the privilege. Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine having a discharging device such as a payout device, when such a ball clogging occurs, there is a gaming machine having a control for eliminating the ball clogging by executing a predetermined retry operation. .. However, in the big hit game, there is a possibility that the big hit game may be stopped midway if the retry operation or the like is simply performed to solve the problem such as ball clogging. Further, if the big hit game is stagnant, the player may have less interest in the game. The inventions (15) to (28) exemplified below are made in view of such circumstances, and are intended to make a big hit game progress quickly and smoothly and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(15) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
A variable entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter.
Special game executing means for executing a special game for changing the variable entrance into a state in which it is possible to enter, based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
Entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port,
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball detection means,
The game ball detected by the ball detection means is arranged in a path until it is detected by the discharge detection means, and a movable member capable of changing the flowing direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation is provided. A gaming machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
In the round game, the variable entrance is in a state in which it can enter or cannot enter in a predetermined pattern,
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after performing the last possible entry state in the round game, the predetermined entry process is performed with the variable entry port as an entry impossible state,
At least the confirmation processing,
A match determination process for determining whether or not the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance in the round game and the number of discharges match, based on the detection results of the ball entrance detecting means and the discharge detecting means,
Based on a determination that the number of balls entering the variable ball inlet and the number of discharges do not match in the match determination process, a movable member operation process of operating the movable member,
The coincidence determination process can be executed a plurality of times during a period before the execution of the movable member operation process,
Before the execution of the movable member operation process, if it is determined in the coincidence determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable ball entrance coincides with the number of discharges, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A gaming machine characterized by ending.

(16) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
A first variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
A second variable ball entrance that can be changed into a ball-enterable state in which a game ball can enter and a ball-incapable state in which a game ball cannot enter,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
Entry detection means for detecting entry into the second variable entry opening,
Discharge detection means for detecting the discharge of the game ball detected by the ball detection means,
The game ball detected by the ball detection unit is arranged in a path until it is detected by the discharge unit, and a movable member capable of changing the traveling direction of the game ball by performing a predetermined operation is provided. A gaming machine,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games, and one of the first variable ball entrance and the second variable ball entrance changes to a ball entry possible state for each round game. Is
In the case of executing a predetermined round game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter, the second variable entrance is entered after finishing the last entry possible state in the round game. The predetermined confirmation processing is executed as the disabled state,
At least the confirmation processing,
Matching determination processing for determining whether or not the number of balls entered into the second variable ball inlet and the number of discharged balls in the round game match based on the detection results of the ball entrance detection means and the discharge detection means,
A movable member operation process of operating the movable member based on the determination that the number of balls entered into the second variable ball inlet does not match the number of discharged balls in the match determination process,
As the special game, there is a first round game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter and a second round game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter, and The execution pattern of the round game includes a special game having a pattern of executing the first round game after the second round game,
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after executing the special game and ending the last entry possible state in the second round game, at least a part of the confirmation process is performed in the first round game. A game machine characterized in that it can be performed during execution.

Thereby, without waiting for the completion of the confirmation process, the confirmation process of the predetermined round game and the next round game of the predetermined round game (the entry possible state of the next round game) are executed in parallel. It is possible, and it is possible to progress the big hit game quickly and smoothly. This is a pattern composed of a continuous round game, a second round game in which the second big winning opening is in a ball enterable state, and a first round game in which the first big winning opening is in a ball enterable state ( This is made possible by having a special game that has the opposite.

(17) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
A variable entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter.
Special game executing means for executing a special game for changing the variable entrance into a state in which it is possible to enter, based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
Entry detection means for detecting entry into the variable entry port,
A first discharge detecting means and a second discharge detecting means for detecting discharge of the game balls detected by the entering detection means,
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member for guiding the game sphere detected by the entrance detecting means to a specific area or a non-specific area,
A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on a game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means is to detect a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area,
The second discharge detection means detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games,
At least as the round game,
A specific round game in which the variable ball entrance can be entered and a game ball can be guided to a specific area or a non-specific area,
While making the variable ball entrance into a ball enterable state, and having a non-specific round game for guiding the game ball to a non-specific area,
In the case of executing the predetermined round game, after performing the last possible entry state in the round game, the predetermined entry process is performed with the variable entry port as an entry impossible state,
At least the confirmation processing,
Whether or not the number of balls entering the variable ball entrance in the round game matches the number of balls discharged, based on the detection results of the ball detecting unit, the first discharge detecting unit, and the second discharge detecting unit. Match determination processing for determining
Based on determining that the number of balls entering the variable ball inlet and the number of discharges in the match determining process do not match, a movable member operation process for operating the movable member, and
As the special game, a special game having the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and having a pattern of executing the specific round game after the non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game, Prepare,
When executing the special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed next to the non-specific round game. ..

The specific round game that operates the movable member to distribute the game ball entering the variable entrance to the specific area or the non-specific area is unlikely to cause ball clogging etc. in the variable entrance. Higher than a specific round game. Therefore, by performing confirmation processing in the specific round game, it becomes possible to accurately detect and eliminate a ball clogging or the like. Further, since the specific round game is an important round game of whether or not to give a privilege, if a ball clogging or the like occurs before the start of the specific round game, there is a possibility of causing unexpected damage to the player. .. Therefore, in the round game before the start of the specific land game, even in the non-specific round game in which the same variable ball entrance can be entered, by performing the confirmation process, ball clogging etc. in the non-specific round game It is possible to start the specific round game after confirming that there is no such thing, or if there is a ball clogging, etc., after accurately finding and eliminating it. This makes it possible to start the specific round game in a normal state without ball clogging and the like, and prevent the player from suffering unexpected damage.

(18) In the gaming machine described in (15) above,
A game machine characterized in that when the confirmation processing is executed, the next round game can be executed after the confirmation processing is completed.

(19) In the gaming machine described in (16) above,
Of the confirmation processing related to the second round game, at least the movable member operation processing can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(20) In the gaming machine described in (16) or (19) above,
Of the confirmation processes related to the second round game, at least the match determination process can be performed during the execution of the first round game.

(21) In the gaming machine described in (16), (19) or (20) above,
The special game includes the first round game and the second round game, and the execution pattern of the round game includes the second round game, the first round game, and the second round game. Including a first special game having a pattern of executing in sequence,
In the case where the confirmation process is executed after the first special game is executed and the last enterable state in the second round game is finished,
It is possible to perform at least a part of the confirmation processing while the first round game, which is the next round game of the second round game, is being executed, and the first round game is followed by the first round game. A game machine characterized in that, when there is a plan to execute a two-round game, the second-round game is not executed until the confirmation processing is completed.

(22) In the gaming machine described in (17) above,
At least, the confirmation process is executed in both the first specific round game executed in the special game and the non-specific round game executed immediately before the specific round game. Machine.

(23) In the gaming machine described in (17) or (22) above,
The special game includes the specific round game and the non-specific round game, and the execution pattern of the round game includes executing the specific round game after the non-specific round game, and thereafter executing the non-specific round game. Including a first special game having a pattern for performing a particular round game,
In the case of executing the first special game, the confirmation process is executed in both the non-specific round game and the specific round game executed next to the non-specific round game, and the final A game machine characterized in that, in the non-specific round game executed after the specific round game, the coincidence determination process and the movable member operation process are not executed.

(24) In the gaming machine described in (16), (17), (19) to (23),
The coincidence determination process can be executed a plurality of times during a period before the execution of the movable member operation process,
Before the execution of the movable member operation process, if it is determined in the coincidence determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable ball entrance coincides with the number of discharges, the confirmation process is performed without executing the movable member operation process. A gaming machine characterized by ending.

(25) In the gaming machine described in (15), (16), (18) to (21) above,
The discharge detecting means includes a first discharge detecting means and a second discharge detecting means,
By performing a predetermined operation of the movable member, it is supposed to guide the game sphere detected by the entrance detecting means to a specific region or a non-specific region,
A gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined privilege based on a game ball passing through the specific area,
The first discharge detection means detects a game ball passing through the non-specific area,
A game machine characterized in that the second discharge detection means detects a game ball passing through the specific area.

(26) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (25) above,
The second discharge detection means is set with an effective period in which a privilege is given when a game ball is detected, and an invalid period in which a privilege is not given even if a game ball is detected,
After the last possible entry state in the specific round game is finished, the valid period is continued for a first period while the variable entry port is in a non-enterable state, and the invalid period is set after the first period elapses. In case of
The movable member operation process is executable after the ineffective period is continued for a second period,
A game machine, characterized in that the first match determination process in the confirmation process is executed during the valid period after the final entry possible state in the round game is finished.

(27) In the gaming machine described in (26), the match determination process can be executed a plurality of times in each of the first period and the second period.

(28) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (27) above,
The game machine characterized in that the coincidence determination process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle from the start of the confirmation process to the end of the confirmation process.

(29) In the gaming machine described in (15) to (28), the following configuration can be added.
Specifically, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, "as a confirmation process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entering the variable ball inlet does not match the number of discharges, an error notification is given in a predetermined mode after a predetermined time has elapsed. Has an error notification process that executes
The match determination process can be executed multiple times before the error notification process is executed.
Before executing the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entrance and the number of discharges match, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process." Good.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "the matching determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification process,
During the error notification process, if it is determined in the match determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable entrance is equal to the number of balls discharged, the error notification being executed is terminated and the confirmation process is terminated." Good.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "the matching determination process can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the error notification,
In the match determination process executed during error notification, if it is not determined that the number of balls entered into the variable entrance is equal to the number of discharged balls, the error notification is terminated after a predetermined period of time, and the confirmation process is performed. It may be finished”.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, "the error notification processing can be executed when the third period elapses after the movable member operation processing ends,
The match determination process can be executed multiple times in the third period,
During the execution of the third period, if it is determined in the coincidence determination process that the number of balls entered into the variable ball entrance coincides with the number of discharged balls, the confirmation process is terminated without executing the error notification process." Good.

In addition, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the specific round game allows the game ball to pass to the specific region, and when the game ball passes the specific region, a privilege is given. Round game in which the privilege can be given”. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, the movable member does not operate, and the game balls do not pass through the specific region (all pass through the non-specific region), so this "non-specific round game" is given a "predetermined privilege". It may be a "round game not given".

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "a special game having a pattern of executing a specific round game after a non-specific round game in the execution pattern of the round game" means, among a plurality of round games constituting the special game, It suffices to have a part that is executed in the order of non-specific round game and specific round game. For other round games, whether it is a non-specific round game, a specific round game, or another round It may be a game.

Further, in the gaming machine described above, "a first special game having a pattern of executing a first round game after a second round game as an execution pattern of a round game" means execution of a round game executed in a special game. In a part of the pattern, a second round game in which the second variable entrance is allowed to enter and a first round game in which the first variable entrance is allowed to enter are continuously executed. It is sufficient if there is a pattern to be played, and the other round games may be the first round game or the second round game. Further, the confirmation process only needs to be executed in the specific second round game, and in other round games, the confirmation process may or may not be executed. For example, in a special game composed of 15 round games, the second round is the second round game, the third round is the first round game, and the confirmation process can be executed in the second round game of the second round. If so, the other round game may be any round game, and the confirmation process may not be executed. Further, as a special game, it suffices to have a special game having such an execution pattern, and in addition, a special game having no such execution pattern may be provided.

Conventionally, in a special game, a game ball passes through a specific area in the special winning opening to give a predetermined privilege, and an ending period is set after finishing all opening operations in the special game. There has been one that executes an ending effect for informing the player of a game mode (privilege-granting state) to be transferred after the game is over. In the patent document (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-161615), a plurality of effects are provided as an ending effect, and an ending effect according to a game mode that shifts after the big hit game ends during a specific ending period that is set. It is described to be executed. However, in such a gaming machine, no matter what the gaming state after the transition is, the ending production composed of the same production period is executed, so that there is no sharpness and the ending production has low taste. Was becoming. Inventions (30) to (38) exemplified below are made in view of such circumstances, and by setting an ending period according to a game result, an appropriate ending according to a game state to be transitioned. The effect can be executed and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(30) win/fail judgment means for making a win/no judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the hit determination,
A variable entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter.
A specific area provided in the variable entrance, through which game balls can pass,
When the result of the hit determination is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and a special game executing means for executing a special game capable of changing the variable entrance into a state in which the entrance is possible is provided. ,
A gaming machine in which the special game is executed and a predetermined privilege can be given based on a game ball passing through the specific area,
The special game is composed of a predetermined number of round games,
When executing the special game, after the completion of all round games in the special game, after the end period of the predetermined period has elapsed, the identification information can be variably displayed,
As the end period, the end period determining means for determining any one of a plurality of end periods of different length,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ending period determining means can determine the ending period of different lengths based on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

(31) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
A ball entrance that can be changed to a first mode and a second mode that has a higher possibility of entering a game ball than the first mode,
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which a game ball enters the ball inlet more frequently than the first game state;
As the identification result, there is a first identification result,
In the case of executing the special game with the first specific result in the first game state, the ending period of different length is determined based on whether or not the specific region is passed,
In the second game state, when the first specific result is obtained and the special game is executed, the end period having the same length is determined whether the special region is passed or not. A gaming machine to do.

According to such a gaming machine, the game player has the first specified result as the specified result, and when the first specified result is obtained in the (normal) first game state in which the game ball has a low entrance frequency (normal). Determines an end period having a different length depending on whether or not it passes through a specific area. Further, in the second game state in which the game ball has a high frequency of entry, when the first specific result is obtained, the end period of the same length is determined whether the specific region is passed or not. (That is, the end period does not change). Thus, for example, in the normal state, by changing the end period by passing or not passing the specific area (granting or non-granting), after the end period of an appropriate length is passed, the variable display of the identification information is started. It is possible to do so, and it becomes possible to give sharpness to the transition mode of the game state. On the other hand, when the game state is already in the second game state (for example, high base state), the end period is not changed by passing or not passing the specific area (granting or not granting the privilege), thereby responding to the game state during the game. By setting an appropriate end period, it becomes possible to give sharpness to the game mode transition mode.

(32) In the gaming machine described in (31) above,
The gaming machine, wherein the gaming state setting means can set the gaming state after the end of the special game to the second gaming state.

(33) In the gaming machine described in (30) to (32) above,
The probability of determining whether or not the result of the determination is the specific result is provided with a probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined probability or a high probability higher than the predetermined probability,
A gaming machine characterized in that, based on the fact that the special game is executed and a game ball passes through the specific area, the probability of winning/deciding after the special game is set to the high probability.

(34) In the gaming machine described in (30) to (33) above,
During execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means, an end period effecting means capable of executing a predetermined effect is provided,
As an effect that can be executed in the end period, a plurality of effects having different effect modes and effect periods,
The end period effecting means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determining means.

(35) In the gaming machine described in (34) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the ending period effecting means can execute an effect indicating a gaming state set after the special game in the ending period determined by the ending period determining means.

(36) In the gaming machine described in (30) above,
The end period has at least a first period and a second period shorter than the first period,
The ending period determining means determines the first period when the game ball has passed the specific region in the special game, and determines the first period when the game ball has not passed the specific region in the special game. The second period may be determined in some cases.

(37) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
As the identification result, a first identification result and a second identification result are included,
When the result of the hit determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, the ending period determination means sets the first period when the game ball passes through the specific region in the special game. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the special game, the second period is determined,
When the result of the hit determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period determination means is the same whether or not the game ball passes through the specific region in the special game. A gaming machine characterized by determining the end period of the length.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific result has the first specific result and the second specific result, and when the special game is executed when the result of the hit/miss determination is the first specific result, the special game is executed. The end period having a different length is determined depending on whether or not the game passes through the specific region in the game (passing is the first period, non-passing is the second period). In addition, when the result of the hit determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period of the same length is determined regardless of whether or not the specific region is passed in the special game (( That is, the end period does not change). Thereby, depending on the type of the specific result, it is possible to change the end period by passing or not passing the specific area (granting or not granting the privilege), or not changing the end period. Also, this makes it possible to set an end period of an appropriate length depending on the type of the specific result, and it is possible to start the variable display of the identification information after the end period of an appropriate length. It becomes possible to give sharpness to the transition mode of the game state.

(38) In the gaming machine described in (36) above,
During execution of the end period determined by the end period determination means, an end period effecting means capable of executing a predetermined effect is provided,
As an effect that can be executed in the end period, a plurality of effects having different effect modes and effect periods,
The end period effecting means executes an effect corresponding to the end period determined by the end period determining means,
When the result of the hit determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, the end period effecting means is a game set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determining means. Perform production that can recognize the state,
When the result of the hit determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, the end period effecting means is set after the special game in the end period determined by the end period determining means. A game machine characterized by executing a production in which it is difficult to recognize the state.

According to such a gaming machine, when the result of the hit determination is the first specific result and the special game is executed, as the effect in the end period, an effect capable of recognizing the game state set after the special game is provided. Execute. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is the second specific result and the special game is executed, as the effect in the end period, the effect that is difficult to recognize the game state set after the special game is executed. As a result, when the result of the hit determination is the first specific result, when the game ball passes through the specific region, the ending period of the first period (long term) is set, and the game ball passes through the specific region. If not, the end period of the second period (short period) is set. Then, it is possible to perform an effect capable of recognizing the gaming state after transition (for example, a high-probability state, a low-probability state, etc.) in the end period of an appropriate length set according to the granting or non-granting of the privilege. Becomes Further, when the result of the hit determination is the second specific result, in the set end period, since it is difficult to recognize the game state after transition (for example, the high probability state, the low probability state), the effect is difficult to recognize. The same effect (for example, non-notification effect) is executed whether the specific area is passed or not. Therefore, in the case where the second specific result is obtained, an effect in which it is difficult to recognize the gaming state after the transition is performed in the specific end period without changing the end period set by passing or not passing the specific region. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to set an end period having an appropriate length in accordance with the game mode transition mode and the effect mode performed in the end period. Further, as a result, it becomes possible to start the variable display of the identification information after a proper length of the end period, and to give a sharp change to the game state transition mode.

The patent document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-161615) has five types of special games, special games A to E, and the number of game balls that can be acquired differs depending on the type of special game (500 to 2000 balls). Is described. Therefore, when a special game with a large number of game balls that can be acquired enhances the interest of the game, on the other hand, when a special game with a small number of game balls that can be obtained decreases the interest of the game and the desire to play the game. May decrease. In particular, as a result of playing a game without acquiring a special game for a long time, if the special game acquired is a special game with a small number of game balls that can be acquired, the possibility of lowering the willingness to play may be particularly high. There is. Inventions (39) to (47) illustrated below are made in view of such circumstances, and when a big hit with relatively low profit for the player occurs, a big hit with high profit for the player is generated. Compared with the case where it occurs, it is to make it difficult to understand the start of the big hit game, prevent the player's willingness to play, and maintain and improve the interest of the game.

(39) A ball entrance that can be changed to a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that of the first mode,
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state or a second game state in which a game ball enters the ball inlet more frequently than the first game state,
Determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the result of the determination,
A variable entrance that can be changed into a state where the game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter.
When the result of the determination is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, and a special game executing means for executing a special game that can change the variable entrance into a state in which the entrance is possible,
As the identification result, at least a first identification result and a second identification result are included,
When the result of the determination is the first specific result, the first special game is executed, and when the result is the second specific result, the second special game is executed.
At least as a production that can be executed during the special game, a first special production that can easily recognize the start of the special game, and a second special production that is more difficult to recognize the start of the special game than the first special production. Has,
In at least one of the first gaming state or the second gaming state, if the result of the determination is the first specific result, the second gaming state is set after the end of the first special game, and the result of the determination is In the case of the second specific result, after the end of the second special game is the first game state,
A game machine characterized by executing the first special effect in the first special game and executing the second special effect in the second special game.

(40) In the gaming machine of (39) above,
Equipped with a specific starting port where game balls can enter,
The predetermined condition is at least established based on the game ball entering the specific starting opening,
As a result of the determination based on entering the specific starting opening, a plurality of specific results including the second specific result are included,
When the result of the determination based on the ball entering the specific starting opening is the specific result, the second specific result is a specific result with the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of specific results. A gaming machine to do.

(41) In the gaming machine of (39) or (40) above,
The probability of determining that the result of the determination is the specific result, a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability higher than a predetermined probability or the predetermined probability,
As the variable entrance, has a specific variable entrance having a specific area inside,
The probability setting means can set the high probability after the end of the special game based on the game ball passing through the specific area in the special game,
As the execution mode of the special game, there is a first execution mode in which the game ball is highly likely to pass through the specific area, and a second execution mode in which the game ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area,
A game machine characterized in that the second special game is executed in the second execution mode.

(42) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (41) above,
As the identification result, there is a third identification result,
When the result of the determination is the third specific result, the third special game is executed,
In at least one of the first game state or the second game state, when the result of the determination is the third specific result, the end of the third special game is regarded as the second game state,
In the third special game, the second special effect is executed, and, as the second special effect, an effect having an effect result different from that of the second special effect executed in the second special game is executed. Characteristic gaming machine.

(43) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (42) above,
A game machine characterized in that the start timing of the second special effect is earlier than the start timing of the first special effect.

(44) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (43) above,
The first special effect is an effect different from the variable effect executed during the variable display of the identification information related to the first identification result, and the first special game is started after the end of the variable effect. It is an effect that starts after executing the start effect shown,
The second special effect is a series of effects starting from the middle of execution of variable display of the identification information related to the second identification result.

(45) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (44) above,
A game machine characterized in that both the first special game and the second special game can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit.

(46) In the gaming machine of (44) or (45) above,
A gaming machine, wherein during the execution of the variable display of the identification information related to the second identification result, an effect indicating that the determination result is not the identification result is changed to the second special effect.

(47) In the gaming machine according to any one of (39) to (46) above,
In the second special effect in the second special game, the effect of the effect indicating that the result of the determination is not a specific result is executed, and the second special game is ended.

Also, in the gaming machine described above,
"As a variation effect that starts and ends during execution of variable display of identification information,
When the result of the determination is the specific result, an effect (an effect of a hit mode) that suggests that the result of the determination is the specific result is executed, and when the result of the determination is not the specific result, the result of the determination is specified. It has a specific effect that executes an effect that suggests that it is not the result (outside effect),
In the second special effect, an effect that is common to the effect that suggests that the result of the determination in the specific effect is not the specific result (the effect in the disengagement mode) may be performed”.

Also, in the gaming machine described above,
"As a specific result, having a third specific result of executing the third special game,
As a performance that can be executed at least during the special game, has a third special performance,
The third special effect that can be executed during the special game is an effect that is executed at least during the third special game, and is an effect that is more difficult to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. ,
When the result of the determination in the first game state is the third specific result, the third special effect is executed along with the third special game, and the second game state is set after the end of the third special game." Good.

Alternatively, "in the third special effect, an effect that suggests that the result of the determination is the specific result is executed, and the third special game is ended".
In addition, as a variation effect that starts and ends during execution of variable display of identification information,
When the result of the determination is the specific result, an effect that indicates that the result of the determination is the specific result is executed, and when the result of the determination is not the specific result, it indicates that the result of the determination is not the specific result. It has a specific effect to execute the effect,
In the third special effect, an effect common to the effect indicating that the determination result in the specific effect is the specific result is executed”.

As a result, it becomes possible to make it difficult to notice the start of the special game, and some players may feel that the advantageous state (the second game state) has occurred without executing the special game. Here, it is possible to set the third special effect to the same effect mode as the second special effect as an effect mode in which it is more difficult to recognize the start of the special game than the first special effect. Further, the second special effect may not be the start effect.

Further, other inventions related to the above-mentioned inventions are exemplified in the following (48) to (79).
(48) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
Privilege determination game execution means for executing a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area at a predetermined time during the special game,
A gaming machine equipped with,
Special game effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined special game effect during the special game,
Storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes related to special game effects that can be executed during the special game after the privilege determination game has ended,
Selecting means for selecting an effect mode to be executed from a plurality of effect modes stored in the storage means based on the result of the privilege determination game;
Have
A gaming machine characterized in that the special game executing means executes the special game effect during the special game after the privilege determination game is completed, based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means.

(49) In the gaming machine of (48) above,
When the selecting means selects an effect mode to be executed from the plurality of effect modes, the selecting means selects the effect mode to be executed based on a predetermined selection rate according to the result of the privilege determination game. A gaming machine to do.

(50) In the gaming machine of (48) or (49) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the special game effect executing means executes the special game effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means, as a series of effects after the end of the privilege determination game.

(51) In the gaming machine according to any one of (48) to (50) above,
The special game execution means executes the special game effect during the special game before the privilege determination game ends in a mode indicating which effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. A gaming machine characterized by.

(52) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter, and by opening it, the game ball can enter.
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The variable entrance is a state in which the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is With a non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games of the plurality of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a round game after the predetermined number of times can be executed as the specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
When the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, an opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to a predetermined time after the start of the specific round game, , The same opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round game to a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine of (52) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is highly likely to be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. Will be things. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area, and there is little or no possibility of passing through the specific area. .. Then, the variable entry ball opening pattern when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable entry ball when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game The mouth opening pattern is similar. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

Incidentally, "predetermined time after the start of the specific round game" in "predetermined time after the start of the specific round game from the start of the non-specific round game when executing the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game" "Includes a predetermined time until the end of the particular round game (during the particular round game), and a predetermined time in the next round game (after the next round) performed after the end of the particular round game. .. Incidentally, the round game from the next time onward may be a non-specific round game, a specific round game, or any other round game. Similarly, "the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game" in the predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game from the start of the non-specific round game in the case of executing the non-specific round game in the second special game, , Including a predetermined time until the end of the non-specific round game (during the non-specific round game) and a predetermined time in the next round game (the next round or later) performed after the end of the non-specific round game It is a waste. Incidentally, the round game from the next time onward may be a non-specific round game, a specific round game, or any other round game.

(53) In the gaming machine of (52) above,
One round game is supposed to end at least when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entrance,
At a predetermined time after the start of the specific round game in the first special game and at a predetermined time after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game, each of the predetermined number of game balls is variable by that time. A game machine characterized by being configured to be able to enter a ball opening.

(54) In the gaming machine of (52) or (53) above,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the opening pattern of the non-specific round game in the second special game from the start to the end A game machine having the same opening pattern as the variable entrance.

(55) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (54) above,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance in the specific round game when executing the specific round game in the second special game is the variable entrance of the variable round entrance in the specific round game in the first special game. A gaming machine characterized by an open pattern that is less likely to enter a game ball than an open pattern.

(56) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (55) above,
A gaming machine, wherein the first round game of the plurality of round games is executed as the non-specific round game, and the subsequent second round game is executed as the specific round game.

(57) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (56) above,
Equipped with effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect execution means, at least after the start of the non-specific round game in the first special game and after the start of the non-specific round game in the second special game, executes the same effect. And a gaming machine.

(58) In the gaming machine according to any one of (52) to (57) above,
In addition to the variable ball entrance, another variable ball entrance becomes a ball enterable state in which the game ball can enter by closing and a game ball cannot enter the ball in which the game ball cannot enter. Have,
The other variable ball entrance is in the special game, and in the round game other than the non-specific round game and the specific round game among the plurality of round games, the ball enters in a predetermined opening pattern. It will be possible,
The opening pattern when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the first special game is the same as the opening pattern when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the second special game. A gaming machine characterized by being.

(59) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter, and by opening it, the game ball can enter.
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The variable entrance is a state in which the ball can be entered or cannot be entered by opening and closing during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is With a non-specific round game that does not operate,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
When the non-specific round game is executed in the predetermined number of round games of the first special game and the specific round game is executed in the next round game of the predetermined number of times, the variable in the non-specific round game While opening the entrance at least once, the opening and closing operation to open the variable entrance in the specific round game after a predetermined closing time,
When executing the non-specific round game in the predetermined number of round games of the second special game, in the non-specific round game, in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game A gaming machine, which opens and closes the variable entrance in the same manner as the opening and closing operation.

According to the gaming machine of (59) above, since the movable member operates in the specific round game, the gaming ball entering the variable ball entrance is highly likely to be guided to the specific area and pass through the specific area. Will be things. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area, and there is little or no possibility of passing through the specific area. .. And, the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entrance when the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the variable ball entering when the non-specific round game is executed in the second special game The opening and closing operation of the mouth is similar. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening/closing operation of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

(60) In the gaming machine of (59) above,
When executing the specific round game in the next round game of the predetermined number of times of the second special game, in the specific round game, compared to the specific round game in the first special game, to the variable entrance A gaming machine, wherein the variable ball entrance is opened in a manner that a possibility of entering a game ball is lowered.

(61) In the gaming machine of (59) or (60) above,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

(62) In the gaming machine according to any one of (59) to (61) above,
Equipped with effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect execution means,
Perform a series of effects in the non-specific round game and the specific round game in the first special game,
A gaming machine characterized by executing an effect similar to the series of effects in at least the non-specific round game in the second special game.

(63) In the gaming machine according to any one of (59) to (62) above,
In addition to the variable ball entrance, another variable ball entrance becomes a ball enterable state in which the game ball can enter by closing and a game ball cannot enter the ball in which the game ball cannot enter. Have,
The other variable ball entrance becomes the ball enterable state or the ball enterable state by opening and closing during the special game, and the non-specific round game of the plurality of round games and With the round game other than the specific round game, the ball can be entered,
The opening/closing operation when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the first special game and the opening/closing operation when the other variable ball entrance is opened during the second special game are the same. A game machine characterized by being performed in the form of.

(64) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball can not enter the ball, by opening it, the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance,
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
The variable entrance is capable of opening at a predetermined opening time during the special game,
As the special game, at least,
A predetermined number of round games of the plurality of round games are performed as a first non-specific round in which the movable member is not operated while performing the first opening operation in which the opening time of the variable ball entrance is the first time. Executed, the second round operation of the predetermined number of times, performing a second opening operation in which the opening time of the variable ball entrance is a second time longer than the first time, and operating the movable member The first special game to be executed as one specific round,
A second special game in which the round game of the predetermined number of times is performed as a second non-specific round in which the opening operation similar to the first opening operation and the second opening operation is performed in this order and the movable member is not operated. ,
A gaming machine characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (64) above, the second opening operation in the case where the first specific round is executed increases the possibility that the game ball will enter the variable ball entrance (it becomes easy to enter). Since the movable member operates in the first specific round in which the second opening operation is performed, the game ball entering the variable entrance is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. It is very likely. On the other hand, in the first non-specific round and the second non-specific round, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance may not be guided to the specific area and may pass through the specific area. Is low or none. Then, the opening operation (first opening operation, second opening operation) of the variable entrance when the first non-specific round and the first specific round are executed in the first special game, and the second special game The opening operation of the variable entrance is the same when the second non-specific round is executed. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening operation of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

(65) In the gaming machine of (64) above,
In the second special game, the predetermined round of the next round game, the opening time of the variable entrance is shorter than the second time, the game ball enters the variable entrance A game machine characterized by performing a third opening operation having a lower possibility than in the first specific round and performing the second specific round in which the movable member is operated.

(66) In the gaming machine of (64) or (65) above,
The second opening operation is an opening operation for opening the variable ball entrance multiple times within the second time.

(67) In the gaming machine according to any one of (64) to (66) above,
In the first special game, after executing a round game as the first non-specific round, a round game as the first specific round is executed after a predetermined interval period,
In the second special game, when performing a round game as the second non-specific round, after performing the first opening operation, perform the second opening operation after a closing time similar to the interval period. A gaming machine characterized by.

(68) In the gaming machine according to any one of (64) to (67) above,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

(69) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball can not enter the ball, by opening it, the game ball can enter the variable ball entrance,
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
The variable ball entrance can be opened in a predetermined opening pattern in the round game,
As the opening pattern of the variable entrance, at least a first opening pattern in which the opening time of the variable entrance is a predetermined time, and a second opening time is shorter than the first opening pattern And an open pattern,
At least as the round game,
A first specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the first opening pattern and the movable member is operated,
A second specific round game in which the variable entrance is opened in the second opening pattern and the movable member is operated,
And a non-specific round game in which the movable member is not operated while opening the variable entrance in a predetermined opening pattern,
A predetermined number of round games of the plurality of round games can be executed as the first specific round game or the second specific round game, and
It has either one or both of the previous round game following the predetermined number of times and the subsequent round game following the predetermined number of times, and either or both of the previous round game and the following round game Can be executed as a specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game capable of executing the first specific round game and the non-specific round game, and a second special game capable of executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game. Has,
In the first special game, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed, the variable entrance opening pattern in the execution period, and the second special game A gaming machine characterized by having the same opening pattern of the variable entrance in the execution period when the second specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed.

According to the gaming machine of (69), the opening pattern (first opening pattern) of the variable entrance when the first specific round game is executed is variable when the second specific round game is executed. Since the opening time is longer than the opening pattern (second opening pattern) of the ball opening, the possibility of entering the game ball into the variable entrance is higher in the first specific round game than in the second specific round game. Sphere becomes easy). Therefore, the first specific round game has a higher possibility that the game ball is guided to the specific region and passes through the specific region, as compared with the second specific round game. On the other hand, in the non-specific round game, since the movable member does not operate, the game ball entering the variable ball entrance is not guided to the specific area and does not pass through the specific area. Then, when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game and the second specific round game in the second special game, The opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game when the non-specific round game is executed becomes similar. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

In addition, "having either one or both of a previous round game that continues before the predetermined number of times and a rear round game that follows the predetermined number of times" means that the round game that follows the predetermined number of times is the predetermined number of times. It is included in the case before, the case after the predetermined number of times, and the case before and after the predetermined number of times. In addition, "one or both of the previous round game and the subsequent round game can be executed as the non-specific round game" means that a round game existing before a predetermined number of times is executed as the non-specific round game. It includes a case where a round game existing after the predetermined number of times is executed as a non-specific round game, and a case where round games existing before and after the predetermined number of times are executed as a non-specific round game. Also, for the "the first specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the first special game and the "the second specific round game and the non-specific round game" in the second special game, a specific round game (first specific game) Either the round game, the second specific round game) or the non-specific round game may be executed first (or later). That is, even if the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is "first" and the non-specific round game is "rear", the non-specific round game is "first" and the specific round game (first Either one specific round game or the second specific round game may be "after". In addition, "the execution period when the first specific round game and the non-specific round game are continuously executed" means from the start of one of the first specific round game and the non-specific round game. Refers to the period until the end of the other round game, "the relevant execution period when continuously executing the second specific round game and the non-specific round game", the second specific round game and non-specific round game The period from the start of one round game to the end of the other round game.

(70) In the gaming machine of (69) above,
A gaming machine having at least one previous round game before the predetermined number of times, and executing the previous round game as the non-specific round game.

According to the gaming machine of (70), the first special game that executes at least one round game that follows the first specific round game as a non-specific round game, and at least that that follows the second specific round game. A specification including a second special game for executing one round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round) after at least one non-specific round game. In a specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing a game), through a single non-specific round game and a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) The opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same in the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (first special game or second special game) in the specification.

(71) In the gaming machine of (69) or (70) above,
After the predetermined number of times, there is at least one subsequent round game, and the subsequent round game is executed as the non-specific round game.

According to the gaming machine of (71), a first special game in which at least one round game following the first specific round game is executed as a non-specific round game, and at least one subsequent game after the second specific round game. Specifications including a second special game for executing the round game as a non-specific round game, in other words, at least one non-specific round game after the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In a specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) for executing, opening of a variable entrance through a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) and non-specific round game It is possible to use the same pattern for the first special game and the second special game. This makes it difficult to determine the type of special game being executed (first special game or second special game) in the specification. Incidentally, the specification can include the specification relating to the gaming machine of (66). That is, a specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) is executed after at least one non-specific round game, and the specific round game (first specific round game, second specific round game) In the specification including a special game (first special game, second special game) that executes at least one non-specific round game next to, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through each round game is set to the first special game. The game and the second special game can be the same.

(72) In the gaming machine according to any one of (69) to (71) above,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first or second round game.

(73) identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter, and by opening it, the game ball can enter.
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The variable entrance is a state in which the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is With a non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games of the plurality of round games can be executed as the specific round game, and a predetermined number of next round games can be executed as the non-specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the first special game allows the ball to enter the game ball compared to the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly open pattern,
The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, and the second When the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in a special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round to the end of the non-specific round game is the same. And the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of (73), the opening pattern of the variable entrance when the specific round game is executed in the first special game is the same as when the specific round game is executed in the second special game. Compared to the opening pattern of the variable entrance, the possibility of entering the game ball into the variable entrance is higher (the entrance is easier), so the first special game is a game compared to the second special game. There is a high possibility that the sphere is guided to the specific area and passes through the specific area. Then, when the specific round game and the non-specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game, and the specific round game and the non-specific round game in the second special game Since the opening pattern of the variable entrance through the round game is the same when is executed, the first special game and the second special game can be distinguished from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. It will be difficult. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

(74) In the gaming machine of (73) above,
The opening time of the variable entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game The opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start to the end of the non-specific round game is the same.

(75) In the gaming machine of (73) or (74) above,
The number of times the variable ball entrance is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the specific round in the first special game to the end of the non-specific round game, and the specific round in the second special game From the start to the end of the non-specific round game, the number of times the variable entrance is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable entrance is the same.

(76) Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
By closing, the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter, and by opening it, the game ball can enter.
By performing a predetermined operation, a movable member capable of guiding the game ball entering the variable entrance into a specific area,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable ball entrance has passed through the specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The variable entrance is a state in which the ball can be entered in a predetermined opening pattern during the special game,
The special game is composed of multiple round games,
As the round game, at least a specific round game in which the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is operated, and the variable ball entrance is in the ball enterable state and the movable member is With a non-specific round game that does not operate,
A predetermined number of round games of the plurality of round games can be executed as the non-specific round game, and a predetermined number of next round games can be executed as the specific round game,
As the special game, at least a first special game and a second special game,
The opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the first special game allows the ball to enter the game ball compared to the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance in the specific round game in the second special game. It is a highly open pattern,
When the non-specific round game and the specific round game are executed in the first special game, the opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game, and the second The opening pattern of the variable entrance from the start of the non-specific round to the end of the specific round game when executing the non-specific round game and the specific round game in a special game is the same. And the gaming machine.

The game machine of (76) is a game machine of (73) in which the execution order of the specific round game and the non-specific round game is reversed. That is, the round game next to the non-specific round game can be executed as the specific round game. In the gaming machine of (76), like the gaming machine of (73), it is difficult to distinguish the first special game and the second special game from the opening pattern of the variable entrance. As a result, when the variable ball entrance is opened in the special game, whether a special game (first special game) with a high possibility of passing the game ball to the specific region is being executed, It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether a special game (second special game) with a low possibility of passing is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to determine (violate) the possibility of passing a game ball to a specific area, whether or not the ball has passed, and in addition, a privilege determination game (non-specific round game, specific round game) is provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game of the gaming machine.

(77) In the gaming machine of (76) above,
The opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the non-specific in the second special game The game machine characterized in that the opening time of the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of a round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(78) In the gaming machine of (76) or (77) above,
The number of times the variable ball entrance is opened based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of the non-specific round in the first special game to the end of the specific round game, and the non-specific in the second special game The number of times of opening the variable ball entrance based on the opening pattern of the variable ball entrance from the start of a round to the end of the specific round game is the same.

(79) In the gaming machine according to any one of (73) to (78),
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined number of round games is the first round game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7 image display device, 7b production design display area (production design display section), 8 production design, 20 first starting opening, 21 second starting opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning Mouth, 39 specific area, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub Control board (sub-control section), 100 image control board (image control section), 103a production first special figure reservation indicator, 103b production second special figure reservation indicator, 150 movable piece.

Claims (1)

Identification information display means for stop display after the identification information is variably displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening,
Special game executing means for executing a special game based on the identification information being stopped and displayed in a specific mode,
A variable ball entrance that allows game balls to enter during the special game,
Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the fact that at least one of the game balls entering the variable entrance has passed a specific area,
A gaming machine equipped with ,
A first demonstration execution unit capable of executing a first rendition of Jo Tokoro,
Second effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined second effect during the special game;
Equipped with
As the special game, the special game execution means performs a privilege determination game in which it is determined whether or not to grant the privilege based on whether or not a game ball has passed through the specific area, and a round after the privilege determination game. It is possible to execute a specific special game to play a game,
The first demonstration execution means, the first effect in the variable display of the identification information if the previous SL identification information is the particular special game based on the display stops at a particular manner and variably displayed is performed together can begin, the first effect that the start identification information in the varying display can ends after the start of the benefits determined game in the particular special game to be executed based on the stopped and displayed in a specific manner Yes,
The second effect execution means can execute the second effect in the round game after the privilege determination game after the end of the first effect, and the second effect is the result of the privilege determination game. A game machine characterized by being executable as a result notification effect .

Images